Search Results

Search found 6339 results on 254 pages for 'ready cent'.

Page 250/254 | < Previous Page | 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254  | Next Page >

  • ProFTPd server on Ubuntu getting access denied message when successfully authenticated?

    - by exxoid
    I have a Ubuntu box with a ProFTPD 1.3.4a Server, when I try to log in via my FTP Client I cannot do anything as it does not allow me to list directories; I have tried logging in as root and as a regular user and tried accessing different paths within the FTP Server. The error I get in my FTP Client is: Status: Retrieving directory listing... Command: CDUP Response: 250 CDUP command successful Command: PWD Response: 257 "/var" is the current directory Command: PASV Response: 227 Entering Passive Mode (172,16,4,22,237,205). Command: MLSD Response: 550 Access is denied. Error: Failed to retrieve directory listing Any idea? Here is the config of my proftpd: # # /etc/proftpd/proftpd.conf -- This is a basic ProFTPD configuration file. # To really apply changes, reload proftpd after modifications, if # it runs in daemon mode. It is not required in inetd/xinetd mode. # # Includes DSO modules Include /etc/proftpd/modules.conf # Set off to disable IPv6 support which is annoying on IPv4 only boxes. UseIPv6 off # If set on you can experience a longer connection delay in many cases. IdentLookups off ServerName "Drupal Intranet" ServerType standalone ServerIdent on "FTP Server ready" DeferWelcome on # Set the user and group that the server runs as User nobody Group nogroup MultilineRFC2228 on DefaultServer on ShowSymlinks on TimeoutNoTransfer 600 TimeoutStalled 600 TimeoutIdle 1200 DisplayLogin welcome.msg DisplayChdir .message true ListOptions "-l" DenyFilter \*.*/ # Use this to jail all users in their homes # DefaultRoot ~ # Users require a valid shell listed in /etc/shells to login. # Use this directive to release that constrain. # RequireValidShell off # Port 21 is the standard FTP port. Port 21 # In some cases you have to specify passive ports range to by-pass # firewall limitations. Ephemeral ports can be used for that, but # feel free to use a more narrow range. # PassivePorts 49152 65534 # If your host was NATted, this option is useful in order to # allow passive tranfers to work. You have to use your public # address and opening the passive ports used on your firewall as well. # MasqueradeAddress 1.2.3.4 # This is useful for masquerading address with dynamic IPs: # refresh any configured MasqueradeAddress directives every 8 hours <IfModule mod_dynmasq.c> # DynMasqRefresh 28800 </IfModule> # To prevent DoS attacks, set the maximum number of child processes # to 30. If you need to allow more than 30 concurrent connections # at once, simply increase this value. Note that this ONLY works # in standalone mode, in inetd mode you should use an inetd server # that allows you to limit maximum number of processes per service # (such as xinetd) MaxInstances 30 # Set the user and group that the server normally runs at. # Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new files and dirs # (second parm) from being group and world writable. Umask 022 022 # Normally, we want files to be overwriteable. AllowOverwrite on # Uncomment this if you are using NIS or LDAP via NSS to retrieve passwords: # PersistentPasswd off # This is required to use both PAM-based authentication and local passwords AuthPAMConfig proftpd AuthOrder mod_auth_pam.c* mod_auth_unix.c # Be warned: use of this directive impacts CPU average load! # Uncomment this if you like to see progress and transfer rate with ftpwho # in downloads. That is not needed for uploads rates. # UseSendFile off TransferLog /var/log/proftpd/xferlog SystemLog /var/log/proftpd/proftpd.log # Logging onto /var/log/lastlog is enabled but set to off by default #UseLastlog on # In order to keep log file dates consistent after chroot, use timezone info # from /etc/localtime. If this is not set, and proftpd is configured to # chroot (e.g. DefaultRoot or <Anonymous>), it will use the non-daylight # savings timezone regardless of whether DST is in effect. #SetEnv TZ :/etc/localtime <IfModule mod_quotatab.c> QuotaEngine off </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ratio.c> Ratios off </IfModule> # Delay engine reduces impact of the so-called Timing Attack described in # http://www.securityfocus.com/bid/11430/discuss # It is on by default. <IfModule mod_delay.c> DelayEngine on </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ctrls.c> ControlsEngine off ControlsMaxClients 2 ControlsLog /var/log/proftpd/controls.log ControlsInterval 5 ControlsSocket /var/run/proftpd/proftpd.sock </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ctrls_admin.c> AdminControlsEngine off </IfModule> # # Alternative authentication frameworks # #Include /etc/proftpd/ldap.conf #Include /etc/proftpd/sql.conf # # This is used for FTPS connections # #Include /etc/proftpd/tls.conf # # Useful to keep VirtualHost/VirtualRoot directives separated # #Include /etc/proftpd/virtuals.con # A basic anonymous configuration, no upload directories. # <Anonymous ~ftp> # User ftp # Group nogroup # # We want clients to be able to login with "anonymous" as well as "ftp" # UserAlias anonymous ftp # # Cosmetic changes, all files belongs to ftp user # DirFakeUser on ftp # DirFakeGroup on ftp # # RequireValidShell off # # # Limit the maximum number of anonymous logins # MaxClients 10 # # # We want 'welcome.msg' displayed at login, and '.message' displayed # # in each newly chdired directory. # DisplayLogin welcome.msg # DisplayChdir .message # # # Limit WRITE everywhere in the anonymous chroot # <Directory *> # <Limit WRITE> # DenyAll # </Limit> # </Directory> # # # Uncomment this if you're brave. # # <Directory incoming> # # # Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new files and dirs # # # (second parm) from being group and world writable. # # Umask 022 022 # # <Limit READ WRITE> # # DenyAll # # </Limit> # # <Limit STOR> # # AllowAll # # </Limit> # # </Directory> # # </Anonymous> # Include other custom configuration files Include /etc/proftpd/conf.d/ UseReverseDNS off <Global> RootLogin on UseFtpUsers on ServerIdent on DefaultChdir /var/www DeleteAbortedStores on LoginPasswordPrompt on AccessGrantMsg "You have been authenticated successfully." </Global> Any idea what could be wrong? Thanks for your help!

    Read the article

  • Integrating HTML into Silverlight Applications

    - by dwahlin
    Looking for a way to display HTML content within a Silverlight application? If you haven’t tried doing that before it can be challenging at first until you know a few tricks of the trade.  Being able to display HTML is especially handy when you’re required to display RSS feeds (with embedded HTML), SQL Server Reporting Services reports, PDF files (not actually HTML – but the techniques discussed will work), or other HTML content.  In this post I'll discuss three options for displaying HTML content in Silverlight applications and describe how my company is using these techniques in client applications. Displaying HTML Overlays If you need to display HTML over a Silverlight application (such as an RSS feed containing HTML data in it) you’ll need to set the Silverlight control’s windowless parameter to true. This can be done using the object tag as shown next: <object data="data:application/x-silverlight-2," type="application/x-silverlight-2" width="100%" height="100%"> <param name="source" value="ClientBin/HTMLAndSilverlight.xap"/> <param name="onError" value="onSilverlightError" /> <param name="background" value="white" /> <param name="minRuntimeVersion" value="4.0.50401.0" /> <param name="autoUpgrade" value="true" /> <param name="windowless" value="true" /> <a href="http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=149156&v=4.0.50401.0" style="text-decoration:none"> <img src="http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=161376" alt="Get Microsoft Silverlight" style="border-style:none"/> </a> </object> By setting the control to “windowless” you can overlay HTML objects by using absolute positioning and other CSS techniques. Keep in mind that on Windows machines the windowless setting can result in a performance hit when complex animations or HD video are running since the plug-in content is displayed directly by the browser window. It goes without saying that you should only set windowless to true when you really need the functionality it offers. For example, if I want to display my blog’s RSS content on top of a Silverlight application I could set windowless to true and create a user control that grabbed the content and output it using a DataList control: <style type="text/css"> a {text-decoration:none;font-weight:bold;font-size:14pt;} </style> <div style="margin-top:10px; margin-left:10px;margin-right:5px;"> <asp:DataList ID="RSSDataList" runat="server" DataSourceID="RSSDataSource"> <ItemTemplate> <a href='<%# XPath("link") %>'><%# XPath("title") %></a> <br /> <%# XPath("description") %> <br /> </ItemTemplate> </asp:DataList> <asp:XmlDataSource ID="RSSDataSource" DataFile="http://weblogs.asp.net/dwahlin/rss.aspx" XPath="rss/channel/item" CacheDuration="60" runat="server" /> </div> The user control can then be placed in the page hosting the Silverlight control as shown below. This example adds a Close button, additional content to display in the overlay window and the HTML generated from the user control. <div id="RSSDiv"> <div style="background-color:#484848;border:1px solid black;height:35px;width:100%;"> <img alt="Close Button" align="right" src="Images/Close.png" onclick="HideOverlay();" style="cursor:pointer;" /> </div> <div style="overflow:auto;width:800px;height:565px;"> <div style="float:left;width:100px;height:103px;margin-left:10px;margin-top:5px;"> <img src="http://weblogs.asp.net/blogs/dwahlin/dan2008.jpg" style="border:1px solid Gray" /> </div> <div style="float:left;width:300px;height:103px;margin-top:5px;"> <a href="http://weblogs.asp.net/dwahlin" style="margin-left:10px;font-size:20pt;">Dan Wahlin's Blog</a> </div> <br /><br /><br /> <div style="clear:both;margin-top:20px;"> <uc:BlogRoller ID="BlogRoller" runat="server" /> </div> </div> </div> Of course, we wouldn’t want the RSS HTML content to be shown until requested. Once it’s requested the absolute position of where it should show above the Silverlight control can be set using standard CSS styles. The following ID selector named #RSSDiv handles hiding the overlay div shown above and determines where it will be display on the screen. #RSSDiv { background-color:White; position:absolute; top:100px; left:300px; width:800px; height:600px; border:1px solid black; display:none; } Now that the HTML content to display above the Silverlight control is set, how can we show it as a user clicks a HyperlinkButton or other control in the application? Fortunately, Silverlight provides an excellent HTML bridge that allows direct access to content hosted within a page. The following code shows two JavaScript functions that can be called from Siverlight to handle showing or hiding HTML overlay content. The two functions rely on jQuery (http://www.jQuery.com) to make it easy to select HTML objects and manipulate their properties: function ShowOverlay() { rssDiv.css('display', 'block'); } function HideOverlay() { rssDiv.css('display', 'none'); } Calling the ShowOverlay function is as simple as adding the following code into the Silverlight application within a button’s Click event handler: private void OverlayHyperlinkButton_Click(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e) { HtmlPage.Window.Invoke("ShowOverlay"); } The result of setting the Silverlight control’s windowless parameter to true and showing the HTML overlay content is shown in the following screenshot:   Thinking Outside the Box to Show HTML Content Setting the windowless parameter to true may not be a viable option for some Silverlight applications or you may simply want to go about showing HTML content a different way. The next technique I’ll show takes advantage of simple HTML, CSS and JavaScript code to handle showing HTML content while a Silverlight application is running in the browser. Keep in mind that with Silverlight’s HTML bridge feature you can always pop-up HTML content in a new browser window using code similar to the following: System.Windows.Browser.HtmlPage.Window.Navigate( new Uri("http://silverlight.net"), "_blank"); For this example I’ll demonstrate how to hide the Silverlight application while maximizing a container div containing the HTML content to show. This allows HTML content to take up the full screen area of the browser without having to set windowless to true and when done right can make the user feel like they never left the Silverlight application. The following HTML shows several div elements that are used to display HTML within the same browser window as the Silverlight application: <div id="JobPlanDiv"> <div style="vertical-align:middle"> <img alt="Close Button" align="right" src="Images/Close.png" onclick="HideJobPlanIFrame();" style="cursor:pointer;" /> </div> <div id="JobPlan_IFrame_Container" style="height:95%;width:100%;margin-top:37px;"></div> </div> The JobPlanDiv element acts as a container for two other divs that handle showing a close button and hosting an iframe that will be added dynamically at runtime. JobPlanDiv isn’t visible when the Silverlight application loads due to the following ID selector added into the page: #JobPlanDiv { position:absolute; background-color:#484848; overflow:hidden; left:0; top:0; height:100%; width:100%; display:none; } When the HTML content needs to be shown or hidden the JavaScript functions shown next can be used: var jobPlanIFrameID = 'JobPlan_IFrame'; var slHost = null; var jobPlanContainer = null; var jobPlanIFrameContainer = null; var rssDiv = null; $(document).ready(function () { slHost = $('#silverlightControlHost'); jobPlanContainer = $('#JobPlanDiv'); jobPlanIFrameContainer = $('#JobPlan_IFrame_Container'); rssDiv = $('#RSSDiv'); }); function ShowJobPlanIFrame(url) { jobPlanContainer.css('display', 'block'); $('<iframe id="' + jobPlanIFrameID + '" src="' + url + '" style="height:100%;width:100%;" />') .appendTo(jobPlanIFrameContainer); slHost.css('width', '0%'); } function HideJobPlanIFrame() { jobPlanContainer.css('display', 'none'); $('#' + jobPlanIFrameID).remove(); slHost.css('width', '100%'); } ShowJobPlanIFrame() handles showing the JobPlanDiv div and adding an iframe into it dynamically. Once JobPlanDiv is shown, the Silverlight control host has its width set to a value of 0% to allow the control to stay alive while making it invisible to the user. I found that this technique works better across multiple browsers as opposed to manipulating the Silverlight control host div’s display or visibility properties. Now that you’ve seen the code to handle showing and hiding the HTML content area, let’s switch focus to the Silverlight application. As a user clicks on a link such as “View Report” the ShowJobPlanIFrame() JavaScript function needs to be called. The following code handles that task: private void ReportHyperlinkButton_Click(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e) { ShowBrowser(_BaseUrl + "/Report.aspx"); } public void ShowBrowser(string url) { HtmlPage.Window.Invoke("ShowJobPlanIFrame", url); } Any URL can be passed into the ShowBrowser() method which handles invoking the JavaScript function. This includes standard web pages or even PDF files. We’ve used this technique frequently with our SmartPrint control (http://www.smartwebcontrols.com) which converts Silverlight screens into PDF documents and displays them. Here’s an example of the content generated:   Silverlight 4’s WebBrowser Control Both techniques shown to this point work well when Silverlight is running in-browser but not so well when it’s running out-of-browser since there’s no host page that you can access using the HTML bridge. Fortunately, Silverlight 4 provides a WebBrowser control that can be used to perform the same functionality quite easily. We’re currently using it in client applications to display PDF documents, SSRS reports and standard HTML content. Using the WebBrowser control simplifies the application quite a bit since no JavaScript is required if the application only runs out-of-browser. Here’s a simple example of defining the WebBrowser control in XAML. I typically define it in MainPage.xaml when a Silverlight Navigation template is used to create the project so that I can re-use the functionality across multiple screens. <Grid x:Name="WebBrowserGrid" HorizontalAlignment="Stretch" VerticalAlignment="Stretch" Visibility="Collapsed"> <StackPanel HorizontalAlignment="Stretch" VerticalAlignment="Stretch"> <Border Background="#484848" HorizontalAlignment="Stretch" Height="40"> <Image x:Name="WebBrowserImage" Width="100" Height="33" Cursor="Hand" HorizontalAlignment="Right" Source="/HTMLAndSilverlight;component/Assets/Images/Close.png" MouseLeftButtonDown="WebBrowserImage_MouseLeftButtonDown" /> </Border> <WebBrowser x:Name="JobPlanReportWebBrowser" HorizontalAlignment="Stretch" VerticalAlignment="Stretch" /> </StackPanel> </Grid> Looking through the XAML you can see that a close image is defined along with the WebBrowser control. Because the URL that the WebBrowser should navigate to isn’t known at design time no value is assigned to the control’s Source property. If the XAML shown above is left “as is” you’ll find that any HTML content assigned to the WebBrowser doesn’t display properly. This is due to no height or width being set on the control. To handle this issue the following code is added into the XAML’s code-behind file to dynamically determine the height and width of the page and assign it to the WebBrowser. This is done by handling the SizeChanged event. void MainPage_SizeChanged(object sender, SizeChangedEventArgs e) { WebBrowserGrid.Height = JobPlanReportWebBrowser.Height = ActualHeight; WebBrowserGrid.Width = JobPlanReportWebBrowser.Width = ActualWidth; } When the user wants to view HTML content they click a button which executes the code shown in next: public void ShowBrowser(string url) { if (Application.Current.IsRunningOutOfBrowser) { JobPlanReportWebBrowser.NavigateToString("<html><body><iframe src='" + url + "' style='width:100%;height:97%;' /></body></html>"); WebBrowserGrid.Visibility = Visibility.Visible; } else { HtmlPage.Window.Invoke("ShowJobPlanIFrame", url); } } private void WebBrowserImage_MouseLeftButtonDown(object sender, MouseButtonEventArgs e) { WebBrowserGrid.Visibility = Visibility.Collapsed; }   Looking through the code you’ll see that it checks to see if the Silverlight application is running out-of-browser and then either displays the WebBrowser control or runs the JavaScript function discussed earlier. Although the WebBrowser control’s Source property could be assigned the URI of the page to navigate to, by assigning HTML content using the NavigateToString() method and adding an iframe, content can be shown from any site including cross-domain sites. This is especially handy when you need to grab a page from a reporting site that’s in a different domain than the Silverlight application. Here’s an example of viewing  PDF file inside of an out-of-browser application. The first image shows the application running out-of-browser before the user clicks a PDF HyperlinkButton.  The second image shows the PDF being displayed.   While there are certainly other techniques that can be used, the ones shown here have worked well for us in different applications and provide the ability to display HTML content in-browser or out-of-browser. Feel free to add a comment if you have another tip or trick you like to use when working with HTML content in Silverlight applications.   Download Code Sample   For more information about onsite, online and video training, mentoring and consulting solutions for .NET, SharePoint or Silverlight please visit http://www.thewahlingroup.com.

    Read the article

  • WCF WS-Security and WSE Nonce Authentication

    - by Rick Strahl
    WCF makes it fairly easy to access WS-* Web Services, except when you run into a service format that it doesn't support. Even then WCF provides a huge amount of flexibility to make the service clients work, however finding the proper interfaces to make that happen is not easy to discover and for the most part undocumented unless you're lucky enough to run into a blog, forum or StackOverflow post on the matter. This is definitely true for the Password Nonce as part of the WS-Security/WSE protocol, which is not natively supported in WCF. Specifically I had a need to create a WCF message on the client that includes a WS-Security header that looks like this from their spec document:<soapenv:Header> <wsse:Security soapenv:mustUnderstand="1" xmlns:wsse="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-secext-1.0.xsd"> <wsse:UsernameToken wsu:Id="UsernameToken-8" xmlns:wsu="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-utility-1.0.xsd"> <wsse:Username>TeStUsErNaMe1</wsse:Username> <wsse:Password Type="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#PasswordText" >TeStPaSsWoRd1</wsse:Password> <wsse:Nonce EncodingType="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-soap-message-security-1.0#Base64Binary" >f8nUe3YupTU5ISdCy3X9Gg==</wsse:Nonce> <wsu:Created>2011-05-04T19:01:40.981Z</wsu:Created> </wsse:UsernameToken> </wsse:Security> </soapenv:Header> Specifically, the Nonce and Created keys are what WCF doesn't create or have a built in formatting for. Why is there a nonce? My first thought here was WTF? The username and password are there in clear text, what does the Nonce accomplish? The Nonce and created keys are are part of WSE Security specification and are meant to allow the server to detect and prevent replay attacks. The hashed nonce should be unique per request which the server can store and check for before running another request thus ensuring that a request is not replayed with exactly the same values. Basic ServiceUtl Import - not much Luck The first thing I did when I imported this service with a service reference was to simply import it as a Service Reference. The Add Service Reference import automatically detects that WS-Security is required and appropariately adds the WS-Security to the basicHttpBinding in the config file:<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?> <configuration> <system.serviceModel> <bindings> <basicHttpBinding> <binding name="RealTimeOnlineSoapBinding"> <security mode="Transport" /> </binding> <binding name="RealTimeOnlineSoapBinding1" /> </basicHttpBinding> </bindings> <client> <endpoint address="https://notarealurl.com:443/services/RealTimeOnline" binding="basicHttpBinding" bindingConfiguration="RealTimeOnlineSoapBinding" contract="RealTimeOnline.RealTimeOnline" name="RealTimeOnline" /> </client> </system.serviceModel> </configuration> If if I run this as is using code like this:var client = new RealTimeOnlineClient(); client.ClientCredentials.UserName.UserName = "TheUsername"; client.ClientCredentials.UserName.Password = "ThePassword"; … I get nothing in terms of WS-Security headers. The request is sent, but the the binding expects transport level security to be applied, rather than message level security. To fix this so that a WS-Security message header is sent the security mode can be changed to: <security mode="TransportWithMessageCredential" /> Now if I re-run I at least get a WS-Security header which looks like this:<s:Envelope xmlns:s="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/" xmlns:u="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-utility-1.0.xsd"> <s:Header> <o:Security s:mustUnderstand="1" xmlns:o="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-secext-1.0.xsd"> <u:Timestamp u:Id="_0"> <u:Created>2012-11-24T02:55:18.011Z</u:Created> <u:Expires>2012-11-24T03:00:18.011Z</u:Expires> </u:Timestamp> <o:UsernameToken u:Id="uuid-18c215d4-1106-40a5-8dd1-c81fdddf19d3-1"> <o:Username>TheUserName</o:Username> <o:Password Type="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#PasswordText" >ThePassword</o:Password> </o:UsernameToken> </o:Security> </s:Header> Closer! Now the WS-Security header is there along with a timestamp field (which might not be accepted by some WS-Security expecting services), but there's no Nonce or created timestamp as required by my original service. Using a CustomBinding instead My next try was to go with a CustomBinding instead of basicHttpBinding as it allows a bit more control over the protocol and transport configurations for the binding. Specifically I can explicitly specify the message protocol(s) used. Using configuration file settings here's what the config file looks like:<?xml version="1.0"?> <configuration> <system.serviceModel> <bindings> <customBinding> <binding name="CustomSoapBinding"> <security includeTimestamp="false" authenticationMode="UserNameOverTransport" defaultAlgorithmSuite="Basic256" requireDerivedKeys="false" messageSecurityVersion="WSSecurity10WSTrustFebruary2005WSSecureConversationFebruary2005WSSecurityPolicy11BasicSecurityProfile10"> </security> <textMessageEncoding messageVersion="Soap11"></textMessageEncoding> <httpsTransport maxReceivedMessageSize="2000000000"/> </binding> </customBinding> </bindings> <client> <endpoint address="https://notrealurl.com:443/services/RealTimeOnline" binding="customBinding" bindingConfiguration="CustomSoapBinding" contract="RealTimeOnline.RealTimeOnline" name="RealTimeOnline" /> </client> </system.serviceModel> <startup> <supportedRuntime version="v4.0" sku=".NETFramework,Version=v4.0"/> </startup> </configuration> This ends up creating a cleaner header that's missing the timestamp field which can cause some services problems. The WS-Security header output generated with the above looks like this:<s:Header> <o:Security s:mustUnderstand="1" xmlns:o="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-secext-1.0.xsd"> <o:UsernameToken u:Id="uuid-291622ca-4c11-460f-9886-ac1c78813b24-1"> <o:Username>TheUsername</o:Username> <o:Password Type="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#PasswordText" >ThePassword</o:Password> </o:UsernameToken> </o:Security> </s:Header> This is closer as it includes only the username and password. The key here is the protocol for WS-Security:messageSecurityVersion="WSSecurity10WSTrustFebruary2005WSSecureConversationFebruary2005WSSecurityPolicy11BasicSecurityProfile10" which explicitly specifies the protocol version. There are several variants of this specification but none of them seem to support the nonce unfortunately. This protocol does allow for optional omission of the Nonce and created timestamp provided (which effectively makes those keys optional). With some services I tried that requested a Nonce just using this protocol actually worked where the default basicHttpBinding failed to connect, so this is a possible solution for access to some services. Unfortunately for my target service that was not an option. The nonce has to be there. Creating Custom ClientCredentials As it turns out WCF doesn't have support for the Digest Nonce as part of WS-Security, and so as far as I can tell there's no way to do it just with configuration settings. I did a bunch of research on this trying to find workarounds for this, and I did find a couple of entries on StackOverflow as well as on the MSDN forums. However, none of these are particularily clear and I ended up using bits and pieces of several of them to arrive at a working solution in the end. http://stackoverflow.com/questions/896901/wcf-adding-nonce-to-usernametoken http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/Forums/en-US/wcf/thread/4df3354f-0627-42d9-b5fb-6e880b60f8ee The latter forum message is the more useful of the two (the last message on the thread in particular) and it has most of the information required to make this work. But it took some experimentation for me to get this right so I'll recount the process here maybe a bit more comprehensively. In order for this to work a number of classes have to be overridden: ClientCredentials ClientCredentialsSecurityTokenManager WSSecurityTokenizer The idea is that we need to create a custom ClientCredential class to hold the custom properties so they can be set from the UI or via configuration settings. The TokenManager and Tokenizer are mainly required to allow the custom credentials class to flow through the WCF pipeline and eventually provide custom serialization. Here are the three classes required and their full implementations:public class CustomCredentials : ClientCredentials { public CustomCredentials() { } protected CustomCredentials(CustomCredentials cc) : base(cc) { } public override System.IdentityModel.Selectors.SecurityTokenManager CreateSecurityTokenManager() { return new CustomSecurityTokenManager(this); } protected override ClientCredentials CloneCore() { return new CustomCredentials(this); } } public class CustomSecurityTokenManager : ClientCredentialsSecurityTokenManager { public CustomSecurityTokenManager(CustomCredentials cred) : base(cred) { } public override System.IdentityModel.Selectors.SecurityTokenSerializer CreateSecurityTokenSerializer(System.IdentityModel.Selectors.SecurityTokenVersion version) { return new CustomTokenSerializer(System.ServiceModel.Security.SecurityVersion.WSSecurity11); } } public class CustomTokenSerializer : WSSecurityTokenSerializer { public CustomTokenSerializer(SecurityVersion sv) : base(sv) { } protected override void WriteTokenCore(System.Xml.XmlWriter writer, System.IdentityModel.Tokens.SecurityToken token) { UserNameSecurityToken userToken = token as UserNameSecurityToken; string tokennamespace = "o"; DateTime created = DateTime.Now; string createdStr = created.ToString("yyyy-MM-ddThh:mm:ss.fffZ"); // unique Nonce value - encode with SHA-1 for 'randomness' // in theory the nonce could just be the GUID by itself string phrase = Guid.NewGuid().ToString(); var nonce = GetSHA1String(phrase); // in this case password is plain text // for digest mode password needs to be encoded as: // PasswordAsDigest = Base64(SHA-1(Nonce + Created + Password)) // and profile needs to change to //string password = GetSHA1String(nonce + createdStr + userToken.Password); string password = userToken.Password; writer.WriteRaw(string.Format( "<{0}:UsernameToken u:Id=\"" + token.Id + "\" xmlns:u=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-utility-1.0.xsd\">" + "<{0}:Username>" + userToken.UserName + "</{0}:Username>" + "<{0}:Password Type=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#PasswordText\">" + password + "</{0}:Password>" + "<{0}:Nonce EncodingType=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-soap-message-security-1.0#Base64Binary\">" + nonce + "</{0}:Nonce>" + "<u:Created>" + createdStr + "</u:Created></{0}:UsernameToken>", tokennamespace)); } protected string GetSHA1String(string phrase) { SHA1CryptoServiceProvider sha1Hasher = new SHA1CryptoServiceProvider(); byte[] hashedDataBytes = sha1Hasher.ComputeHash(Encoding.UTF8.GetBytes(phrase)); return Convert.ToBase64String(hashedDataBytes); } } Realistically only the CustomTokenSerializer has any significant code in. The code there deals with actually serializing the custom credentials using low level XML semantics by writing output into an XML writer. I can't take credit for this code - most of the code comes from the MSDN forum post mentioned earlier - I made a few adjustments to simplify the nonce generation and also added some notes to allow for PasswordDigest generation. Per spec the nonce is nothing more than a unique value that's supposed to be 'random'. I'm thinking that this value can be any string that's unique and a GUID on its own probably would have sufficed. Comments on other posts that GUIDs can be potentially guessed are highly exaggerated to say the least IMHO. To satisfy even that aspect though I added the SHA1 encryption and binary decoding to give a more random value that would be impossible to 'guess'. The original example from the forum post used another level of encoding and decoding to string in between - but that really didn't accomplish anything but extra overhead. The header output generated from this looks like this:<s:Header> <o:Security s:mustUnderstand="1" xmlns:o="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-secext-1.0.xsd"> <o:UsernameToken u:Id="uuid-f43d8b0d-0ebb-482e-998d-f544401a3c91-1" xmlns:u="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-utility-1.0.xsd"> <o:Username>TheUsername</o:Username> <o:Password Type="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#PasswordText">ThePassword</o:Password> <o:Nonce EncodingType="http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-soap-message-security-1.0#Base64Binary" >PjVE24TC6HtdAnsf3U9c5WMsECY=</o:Nonce> <u:Created>2012-11-23T07:10:04.670Z</u:Created> </o:UsernameToken> </o:Security> </s:Header> which is exactly as it should be. Password Digest? In my case the password is passed in plain text over an SSL connection, so there's no digest required so I was done with the code above. Since I don't have a service handy that requires a password digest,  I had no way of testing the code for the digest implementation, but here is how this is likely to work. If you need to pass a digest encoded password things are a little bit trickier. The password type namespace needs to change to: http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#Digest and then the password value needs to be encoded. The format for password digest encoding is this: Base64(SHA-1(Nonce + Created + Password)) and it can be handled in the code above with this code (that's commented in the snippet above): string password = GetSHA1String(nonce + createdStr + userToken.Password); The entire WriteTokenCore method for digest code looks like this:protected override void WriteTokenCore(System.Xml.XmlWriter writer, System.IdentityModel.Tokens.SecurityToken token) { UserNameSecurityToken userToken = token as UserNameSecurityToken; string tokennamespace = "o"; DateTime created = DateTime.Now; string createdStr = created.ToString("yyyy-MM-ddThh:mm:ss.fffZ"); // unique Nonce value - encode with SHA-1 for 'randomness' // in theory the nonce could just be the GUID by itself string phrase = Guid.NewGuid().ToString(); var nonce = GetSHA1String(phrase); string password = GetSHA1String(nonce + createdStr + userToken.Password); writer.WriteRaw(string.Format( "<{0}:UsernameToken u:Id=\"" + token.Id + "\" xmlns:u=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-wssecurity-utility-1.0.xsd\">" + "<{0}:Username>" + userToken.UserName + "</{0}:Username>" + "<{0}:Password Type=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-username-token-profile-1.0#Digest\">" + password + "</{0}:Password>" + "<{0}:Nonce EncodingType=\"http://docs.oasis-open.org/wss/2004/01/oasis-200401-wss-soap-message-security-1.0#Base64Binary\">" + nonce + "</{0}:Nonce>" + "<u:Created>" + createdStr + "</u:Created></{0}:UsernameToken>", tokennamespace)); } I had no service to connect to to try out Digest auth - if you end up needing it and get it to work please drop a comment… How to use the custom Credentials The easiest way to use the custom credentials is to create the client in code. Here's a factory method I use to create an instance of my service client:  public static RealTimeOnlineClient CreateRealTimeOnlineProxy(string url, string username, string password) { if (string.IsNullOrEmpty(url)) url = "https://notrealurl.com:443/cows/services/RealTimeOnline"; CustomBinding binding = new CustomBinding(); var security = TransportSecurityBindingElement.CreateUserNameOverTransportBindingElement(); security.IncludeTimestamp = false; security.DefaultAlgorithmSuite = SecurityAlgorithmSuite.Basic256; security.MessageSecurityVersion = MessageSecurityVersion.WSSecurity10WSTrustFebruary2005WSSecureConversationFebruary2005WSSecurityPolicy11BasicSecurityProfile10; var encoding = new TextMessageEncodingBindingElement(); encoding.MessageVersion = MessageVersion.Soap11; var transport = new HttpsTransportBindingElement(); transport.MaxReceivedMessageSize = 20000000; // 20 megs binding.Elements.Add(security); binding.Elements.Add(encoding); binding.Elements.Add(transport); RealTimeOnlineClient client = new RealTimeOnlineClient(binding, new EndpointAddress(url)); // to use full client credential with Nonce uncomment this code: // it looks like this might not be required - the service seems to work without it client.ChannelFactory.Endpoint.Behaviors.Remove<System.ServiceModel.Description.ClientCredentials>(); client.ChannelFactory.Endpoint.Behaviors.Add(new CustomCredentials()); client.ClientCredentials.UserName.UserName = username; client.ClientCredentials.UserName.Password = password; return client; } This returns a service client that's ready to call other service methods. The key item in this code is the ChannelFactory endpoint behavior modification that that first removes the original ClientCredentials and then adds the new one. The ClientCredentials property on the client is read only and this is the way it has to be added.   Summary It's a bummer that WCF doesn't suport WSE Security authentication with nonce values out of the box. From reading the comments in posts/articles while I was trying to find a solution, I found that this feature was omitted by design as this protocol is considered unsecure. While I agree that plain text passwords are rarely a good idea even if they go over secured SSL connection as WSE Security does, there are unfortunately quite a few services (mosly Java services I suspect) that use this protocol. I've run into this twice now and trying to find a solution online I can see that this is not an isolated problem - many others seem to have struggled with this. It seems there are about a dozen questions about this on StackOverflow all with varying incomplete answers. Hopefully this post provides a little more coherent content in one place. Again I marvel at WCF and its breadth of support for protocol features it has in a single tool. And even when it can't handle something there are ways to get it working via extensibility. But at the same time I marvel at how freaking difficult it is to arrive at these solutions. I mean there's no way I could have ever figured this out on my own. It takes somebody working on the WCF team or at least being very, very intricately involved in the innards of WCF to figure out the interconnection of the various objects to do this from scratch. Luckily this is an older problem that has been discussed extensively online and I was able to cobble together a solution from the online content. I'm glad it worked out that way, but it feels dirty and incomplete in that there's a whole learning path that was omitted to get here… Man am I glad I'm not dealing with SOAP services much anymore. REST service security - even when using some sort of federation is a piece of cake by comparison :-) I'm sure once standards bodies gets involved we'll be right back in security standard hell…© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2012Posted in WCF  Web Services   Tweet !function(d,s,id){var js,fjs=d.getElementsByTagName(s)[0];if(!d.getElementById(id)){js=d.createElement(s);js.id=id;js.src="//platform.twitter.com/widgets.js";fjs.parentNode.insertBefore(js,fjs);}}(document,"script","twitter-wjs"); (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • IIS SSL Certificate Renewal Pain

    - by Rick Strahl
    I’m in the middle of my annual certificate renewal for the West Wind site and I can honestly say that I hate IIS’s certificate system.  When it works it’s fine, but when it doesn’t man can it be a pain. Because I deal with public certificates on my site merely once a year, and you have to perform the certificate dance just the right way, I seem to run into some sort of trouble every year, thinking that Microsoft surely must have addressed the issues I ran into previously – HA! Not so. Don’t ever use the Renew Certificate Feature in IIS! The first rule that I should have never forgotten is that certificate renewals in IIS (7 is what I’m using but I think it’s no different in 7.5 and 8), simply don’t work if you’re submitting to get a public certificate from a certificate authority. I use DNSimple for my DNS domain management and SSL certificates because they provide ridiculously easy domain management and good prices for SSL certs – especially wildcard certificates, which is what I use on west-wind.com. Certificates in IIS can be found pegged to the machine root. If you go into the IIS Manager, go to the machine root the tree and then click on certificates and you then get various certificate options: Both of these options create a new Certificate request (CSR), which is just a text file. But if you’re silly enough like me to click on the Renew button on your old certificate, you’ll find that you end up generating a very long Certificate Request that looks nothing like the original certificate request and the format that’s used for this is not accepted by most certificate authorities. While I’m not sure exactly what the problem is, it simply looks like IIS is respecting none of your original certificate bit size choices and is generating a huge certificate request that is 3 times the size of a ‘normal’ certificate request. The end result is (and I’ve done this at least twice now) is that the certificate processor is likely to fail processing those renewals. Always create a new Certificate While it’s a little more work and you have to remember how to fill out the certificate request properly, this is the safe way to make sure your certificate generates properly. First comes the Distinguished Name Properties dialog: Ah yes you have to love the nomenclature of this stuff. Distinguished name, Common name – WTF is a common name? It doesn’t look common to me! Make sure this form gets filled out correctly. Common NameThis is the domain name of the Web site. In my case I’m creating a wildcard certificate so I’m using the * prefix. If you’re purchasing a certificate for a specific domain use www.west-wind.com or store.west-wind.com for example. Make sure this matches the EXACT domain you’re trying to use secure access on because that’s all the certificate is going to work on unless you get a wildcard certificate. Organization Is the name of your company or organization. Depending on the kind of certificate you purchase this name will show up on your certificate. Most low end SSL certificates (ie. those that cost under $100 for single domains) don’t list the organization, the higher signature certificates that also require extensive validation by the cert authority do. Regardless you should make sure this matches the right company/organization. Organizational Unit This can be anything. Not really sure what this is for, but traditionally I’ve always set this to Web because – well this is a Web thing after all right? I’ve never seen this used anywhere that I can tell other than to internally reference the cert. State and CountryPretty obvious. Should reflect the location of the business/organization/person or site.   Next you have to configure the bit size used for the certificate: The default on this dialog is 1024, but I’ve found that most providers these days request a minimum bit length of 2048, as did my DNSimple provider. Again check with the provider when you submit to make sure. Bit length mismatches can cause problems if you use a size that isn’t supported by the provider. I had that happen last year when I submitted my CSR and it got rejected quite a bit later, when the certs usually are issued within an hour or less. When you’re done here, the certificate is saved to disk as a .txt file and it should look something like this (this is a 2048 bit length CSR):-----BEGIN NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- MIIEVGCCAz0CAQAwdjELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMxDzANBgNVBAgMBkhhd2FpaTENMAsG A1UEBwwEUGFpYTEfMB0GA1UECgwWV2VzdCBXaW5kIFRlY2hub2xvZ2llczEMMAoG B1UECwwDV2ViMRgwFgYDVQQDDA8qLndlc3Qtd2luZC5jb20wggEiMA0GCSqGSIb3 DQEBAQUAA4IBDwAwggEKAoIBAQDIPWOFMkMVRp2Ftj9w/cCVV4OYYhoZYtl+8lTk oqDwKca0xWHLgioX/9v0rZLS6a82MHqKEBxVXu+cuCmSE4AQtB/1YH9lS4tpc/be OZDvnTotP6l4MCEzzAfROcw4CiIg6X0RMSnl8IATAvv2V5LQM9TDdt9oDdMpX2IY +vVC9RZ7PMHBmR9kwI2i/lrKitzhQKaHgpmKcRlM6iqpALUiX28w5HJaDKK1MDHN 607tyFJLHijuJKx7PdTqZYf50KkC3NupfZ2avVycf18Q13jHWj59tvwEOczoVzRL l4LQivAqbhyiqMpWnrZunIOUZta5aGm+jo7O1knGWJjxuraTAgMBAAGgggGYMBoG CisGAQQBgjcNAgMxDBYKNi4yLjkyMDAuMjA0BgkrBgEEAYI3FRQxJzAlAgEFDAZS QVNYUFMMC1JBU1hQU1xSaWNrDAtJbmV0TWdyLmV4ZTByBgorBgEEAYI3DQICMWQw YgIBAR5aAE0AaQBjAHIAbwBzAG8AZgB0ACAAUgBTAEEAIABTAEMAaABhAG4AbgBl AGwAIABDAHIAeQBwAHQAbwBnAHIAYQBwAGgAaQBjACAAUAByAG8AdgBpAGQAZQBy AwEAMIHPBgkqhkiG9w0BCQ4xgcEwgb4wDgYDVR0PAQH/BAQDAgTwMBMGA1UdJQQM MAoGCCsGAQUFBwMBMHgGCSqGSIb3DQEJDwRrMGkwDgYIKoZIhvcNAwICAgCAMA4G CCqGSIb3DQMEAgIAgDALBglghkgBZQMEASowCwYJYIZIAWUDBAEtMAsGCWCGSAFl AwQBAjALBglghkgBZQMEAQUwBwYFKw4DAgcwCgYIKoZIhvcNAwcwHQYDVR0OBBYE FD/yOsTbXE+GVFCFMmldzQvyloz9MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4IBAQCK6LlsCuIM 1AU0niB6QZ9v0FTsGFxP1dYvVUnJyY6VEKNiGFiQjZac7UCs0p58yScdXWEFOE8V OsjAYD3xYNc05+ckyD67UHRGEUAVB9RBvbKW23KeR/8kBmEzc8PemD52YOgExxAJ 57xWmAwEHAvbgYzQvhO8AOzH3TGvvHbg5UKM1pYgNmuwZq5DkL/IDoeIJwfk/wrI wghNTuxxIFgbH4YrgLgv4PRvrS/LaTCRBdboaCgzATMczaOb1nd/DVNR+3fCtMhM W0psTAjzRbmXF3nJyAQa7jF/52gkY0RfFX2lG5tJnG+XDsVNvKNvh9Qa5Tlmkm06 ILKCm9ciWCKk -----END NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- You can take that certificate request and submit that to your certificate provider. Since this is base64 encoded you can typically just paste it into a text box on the submission page, or some providers will ask you to upload the CSR as a file. What does a Renewal look like? Note the length of the CSR will vary somewhat with key strength, but compare this to a renewal request that IIS generated from my existing site:-----BEGIN NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- MIIPpwYFKoZIhvcNAQcCoIIPmDCCD5QCAQExCzAJBgUrDgMCGgUAMIIIqAYJKoZI hvcNAQcBoIIImQSCCJUwggiRMIIH+gIBADBdMSEwHwYDVQQLDBhEb21haW4gQ29u dHJvbCBWYWxpFGF0ZWQxHjAcBgNVBAsMFUVzc2VudGlhbFNTTCBXaWxkY2FyZDEY MBYGA1UEAwwPKi53ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tMIGfMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBAQUAA4GNADCB iQKBgQCK4OuIOR18Wb8tNMGRZiD1c9X57b332Lj7DhbckFqLs0ys8kVDHrTXSj+T Ye9nmAvfPpZmBtE5p9qRNN79rUYugAdl+qEtE4IJe1bRfxXzcKa1SXa8+TEs3zQa zYSmcR2dDuC8om1eAdeCtt0NnkvANgm1VLwGOor/UHMASaEhCQIDAQABoIIG8jAa BgorBgEEAYI3DQIDMQwWCjYuMi45MjAwLjIwNAYJKwYBBAGCNxUUMScwJQIBBQwG UkFTWFBTDAtSQVNYUFNcUmljawwLSW5ldE1nci5leGUwZgYKKwYBBAGCNw0CAjFY MFYCAQIeTgBNAGkAYwByAG8AcwBvAGYAdAAgAFMAdAByAG8AbgBnACAAQwByAHkA cAB0AG8AZwByAGEAcABoAGkAYwAgAFAAcgBvAHYAaQBkAGUAcgMBADCCAQAGCSqG SIb3DQEJDjGB8jCB7zAOBgNVHQ8BAf8EBAMCBaAwDAYDVR0TAQH/BAIwADA0BgNV HSUELTArBggrBgEFBQcDAQYIKwYBBQUHAwIGCisGAQQBgjcKAwMGCWCGSAGG+EIE ATBPBgNVHSAESDBGMDoGCysGAQQBsjEBAgIHMCswKQYIKwYBBQUHAgEWHWh0dHBz Oi8vc2VjdXJlLmNvbW9kby5jb20vQ1BTMAgGBmeBDAECATApBgNVHREEIjAggg8q Lndlc3Qtd2luZC5jb22CDXdlc3Qtd2luZC5jb20wHQYDVR0OBBYEFEVLAyO8gDiv lsfovKrx9mHPyrsiMIIFMAYJKwYBBAGCNw0BMYIFITCCBR0wggQFoAMCAQICEQDu 1E1T5Jvtkm5LOfSHabWlMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAMHIxCzAJBgNVBAYTAkdCMRsw GQYDVQQIExJHcmVhdGVyIE1hbmNoZXN0ZXIxEDAOBgNVBAcTB1NhbGZvcmQxGjAY BgNVBAoTEUNPTU9ETyBDQSBMaW1pdGVkMRgwFgYDVQQDEw9Fc3NlbnRpYWxTU0wg Q0EwHhcNMTQwNTA3MDAwMDAwWhcNMTUwNjA2MjM1OTU5WjBdMSEwHwYDVQQLExhE b21haW4gQ29udHJvbCBWYWxpZGF0ZWQxHjAcBgNVBAsTFUVzc2VudGlhbFNTTCBX aWxkY2FyZDEYMBYGA1UEAxQPKi53ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tMIIBIjANBgkqhkiG9w0B AQEFAAOCAQ8AMIIBCgKCAQEAiyKfL66XB51DlUfm6xXqJBcvMU2qorRHxC+WjEpB amvg8XoqNfCKzDAvLMbY4BLhbYCTagqtslnP3Gj4AKhXqRKU0n6iSbmS1gcWzCJM CHufZ5RDtuTuxhTdJxzP9YqZUfKV5abWQp/TK6V1ryaBJvdqM73q4tRjrQODtkiR PfZjxpybnBHFJS8jYAf8jcOjSDZcgN1d9Evc5MrEJCp/90cAkozyF/NMcFtD6Yj8 UM97z3MzDT2JPDoH3kAr3cCgpUNyQ2+wDNCnL9eWYFkOQi8FZMsZol7KlZ5NgNfO a7iZMVGbqDg6rkS//2uGe6tSQJTTs+mAZB+na+M8XT2UqwIDAQABo4IBwTCCAb0w HwYDVR0jBBgwFoAU2svqrVsIXcz//CZUzknlVcY49PgwHQYDVR0OBBYEFH0AmLiL RSEL9+sQD/n5O4N7/nnqMA4GA1UdDwEB/wQEAwIFoDAMBgNVHRMBAf8EAjAAMDQG A1UdJQQtMCsGCCsGAQUFBwMBBggrBgEFBQcDAgYKKwYBBAGCNwoDAwYJYIZIAYb4 QgQBME8GA1UdIARIMEYwOgYLKwYBBAGyMQECAgcwKzApBggrBgEFBQcCARYdaHR0 cHM6Ly9zZWN1cmUuY29tb2RvLmNvbS9DUFMwCAYGZ4EMAQIBMDsGA1UdHwQ0MDIw MKAuoCyGKmh0dHA6Ly9jcmwuY29tb2RvY2EuY29tL0Vzc2VudGlhbFNTTENBLmNy bDBuBggrBgEFBQcBAQRiMGAwOAYIKwYBBQUHMAKGLGh0dHA6Ly9jcnQuY29tb2Rv Y2EuY29tL0Vzc2VudGlhbFNTTENBXzIuY3J0MCQGCCsGAQUFBzABhhhodHRwOi8v b2NzcC5jb21vZG9jYS5jb20wKQYDVR0RBCIwIIIPKi53ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tgg13 ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4IBAQBqBfd6QHrxXsfgfKARG6np 8yszIPhHGPPmaE7xq7RpcZjY9H+8l6fe4jQbGFjbA5uHBklYI4m2snhPaW2p8iF8 YOkm2V2hEsSTnkf5/flw9mZtlCFEDFXSsBxBdNz8RYTthPMu1h09C0XuDB30sztg nR692FrxJN5/bXsk+MC9nEweTFW/t2HW+XZ8bhM7vsAS+pZionR4MyuQ0mYIt/lD csZVZ91KxTsIm8rNMkkYGFoSIXjQ0+0tCbxMF0i2qnpmNRpA6PU8l7lxxvPkplsk 9KB8QIPFrR5p/i/SUAd9vECWh5+/ktlcrfFP2PK7XcEwWizsvMrNqLyvQVNXSUPT MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4GBABt/NitwMzc5t22p5+zy4HXbVYzLEjesLH8/v0ot uLQ3kkG8tIWNh5RplxIxtilXt09H4Oxpo3fKUN0yw+E6WsBfg0sAF8pHNBdOJi48 azrQbt4HvKktQkGpgYFjLsormjF44SRtToLHlYycDHBNvjaBClUwMCq8HnwY6vDq xikRoIIFITCCBR0wggQFoAMCAQICEQDu1E1T5Jvtkm5LOfSHabWlMA0GCSqGSIb3 DQEBBQUAMHIxCzAJBgNVBAYTAkdCMRswGQYDVQQIExJHcmVhdGVyIE1hbmNoZXN0 ZXIxEDAOBgNVBAcTB1NhbGZvcmQxGjAYBgNVBAoTEUNPTU9ETyBDQSBMaW1pdGVk MRgwFgYDVQQDEw9Fc3NlbnRpYWxTU0wgQ0EwHhcNMTQwNTA3MDAwMDAwWhcNMTUw NjA2MjM1OTU5WjBdMSEwHwYDVQQLExhEb21haW4gQ29udHJvbCBWYWxpZGF0ZWQx HjAcBgNVBAsTFUVzc2VudGlhbFNTTCBXaWxkY2FyZDEYMBYGA1UEAxQPKi53ZXN0 LXdpbmQuY29tMIIBIjANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOCAQ8AMIIBCgKCAQEAiyKfL66X B51DlUfm6xXqJBcvMU2qorRHxC+WjEpBamvg8XoqNfCKzDAvLMbY4BLhbYCTagqt slnP3Gj4AKhXqRKU0n6iSbmS1gcWzCJMCHufZ5RDtuTuxhTdJxzP9YqZUfKV5abW Qp/TK6V1ryaBJvdqM73q4tRjrQODtkiRPfZjxpybnBHFJS8jYAf8jcOjSDZcgN1d 9Evc5MrEJCp/90cAkozyF/NMcFtD6Yj8UM97z3MzDT2JPDoH3kAr3cCgpUNyQ2+w DNCnL9eWYFkOQi8FZMsZol7KlZ5NgNfOa7iZMVGbqDg6rkS//2uGe6tSQJTTs+mA ZB+na+M8XT2UqwIDAQABo4IBwTCCAb0wHwYDVR0jBBgwFoAU2svqrVsIXcz//CZU zknlVcY49PgwHQYDVR0OBBYEFH0AmLiLRSEL9+sQD/n5O4N7/nnqMA4GA1UdDwEB /wQEAwIFoDAMBgNVHRMBAf8EAjAAMDQGA1UdJQQtMCsGCCsGAQUFBwMBBggrBgEF BQcDAgYKKwYBBAGCNwoDAwYJYIZIAYb4QgQBME8GA1UdIARIMEYwOgYLKwYBBAGy MQECAgcwKzApBggrBgEFBQcCARYdaHR0cHM6Ly9zZWN1cmUuY29tb2RvLmNvbS9D UFMwCAYGZ4EMAQIBMDsGA1UdHwQ0MDIwMKAuoCyGKmh0dHA6Ly9jcmwuY29tb2Rv Y2EuY29tL0Vzc2VudGlhbFNTTENBLmNybDBuBggrBgEFBQcBAQRiMGAwOAYIKwYB BQUHMAKGLGh0dHA6Ly9jcnQuY29tb2RvY2EuY29tL0Vzc2VudGlhbFNTTENBXzIu Y3J0MCQGCCsGAQUFBzABhhhodHRwOi8vb2NzcC5jb21vZG9jYS5jb20wKQYDVR0R BCIwIIIPKi53ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tgg13ZXN0LXdpbmQuY29tMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEB BQUAA4IBAQBqBfd6QHrxXsfgfKARG6np8yszIPhHGPPmaE7xq7RpcZjY9H+8l6fe 4jQbGFjbA5uHBklYI4m2snhPaW2p8iF8YOkm2V2hEsSTnkf5/flw9mZtlCFEDFXS sBxBdNz8RYTthPMu1h09C0XuDB30sztgnR692FrxJN5/bXsk+MC9nEweTFW/t2HW +XZ8bhM7vsAS+pZionR4MyuQ0mYIt/lDcsZVZ91KxTsIm8rNMkkYGFoSIXjQ0+0t CbxMF0i2qnpmNRpA6PU8l7lxxvPkplsk9KB8QIPFrR5p/i/SUAd9vECWh5+/ktlc rfFP2PK7XcEwWizsvMrNqLyvQVNXSUPTMYIBrzCCAasCAQEwgYcwcjELMAkGA1UE BhMCR0IxGzAZBgNVBAgTEkdyZWF0ZXIgTWFuY2hlc3RlcjEQMA4GA1UEBxMHU2Fs Zm9yZDEaMBgGA1UEChMRQ09NT0RPIENBIExpbWl0ZWQxGDAWBgNVBAMTD0Vzc2Vu dGlhbFNTTCBDQQIRAO7UTVPkm+2Sbks59IdptaUwCQYFKw4DAhoFADANBgkqhkiG 9w0BAQEFAASCAQB8PNQ6bYnQpWfkHyxnDuvNKw3wrqF2p7JMZm+SuN2qp3R2LpCR mW2LrGtQIm9Iob/QOYH+8houYNVdvsATGPXX2T8gzn+anof4tOG0vCTK1Bp9bwf9 MkRP+1c8RW/vkYmUW4X5/C+y3CZpMH5dDTaXBIpXFzjX/fxNpH/rvLzGiaYYL3Cn OLO+aOADr9qq5yoqwpiYCSfYNNYKTUNNGfYIidQwYtbHXEYhSukB2oR89xD2sZZ4 bOqFjUPgTa5SsERLDDeg3omMKiIXVYGxlqBEq51Kge6IQt4qQV9P9VgInW7cWmKe dTqNHI9ri3ttewdEnT++TKGKKfTjX9SR8Waj -----END NEW CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- Clearly there’s something very different between this an my original request! And it didn’t work. IIS creates a custom CSR that is encoded in a format that no certificate authority I’ve ever used uses. If you want the gory details of what’s in there look at this ServerFault question (thanks to Mika in the comments). In the end it doesn’t matter  though – no certificate authority knows what to do with this CSR. So create a new CSR and skip the renewal. Always! Use the same Server Keep in mind that on IIS at least you should always create your certificate on a single server and then when you receive the final certificate from your provider import it on that server. IIS tracks the CSR it created and requires it in order to import the final certificate properly. So if for some reason you try to install the certificate on another server, it won’t work. I’ve also run into trouble trying to install the same certificate twice – this time around I didn’t give my certificate the proper friendly name and IIS failed to allow me to assign the certificate to any of my Web sites. So I removed the certificate and tried to import again, only to find it failed the second time around. There are other ways to fix this, but in my case I had to have the certificate re-issued to work – not what you want to do. Regardless of what you do though, when you import make sure you do it right the first time by crossing all your t’s and dotting your i's– it’ll save you a lot of grief! You don’t actually have to use the server that the certificate gets installed on to generate the CSR and first install it, but it is generally a good idea to do so just so you can get the certificate installed into the right place right away. If you have access to the server where you need to install the certificate you might as well use it. But you can use another machine to generated the and install the certificate, then export the certificate and move it to another machine as needed. So you can use your Dev machine to create a certificate then export it and install it on a live server. More on installation and back up/export later. Installing the Certificate Once you’ve submitted a CSR request your provider will process the request and eventually issue you a new final certificate that contains another text file with the final key to import into your certificate store. IIS does this by combining the content in your certificate request with the original CSR. If all goes well your new certificate shows up in the certificate list and you’re ready to assign the certificate to your sites. Make sure you use a friendly name that matches domain name of your site. So use *.mysite.com or www.mysite.com or store.mysite.com to ensure IIS recognizes the certificate. I made the mistake of not naming my friendly name this way and found that IIS was unable to link my sites to my wildcard certificate. It needed to have the *. as part of the certificate otherwise the Hostname input field was blanked out. Changing the Friendly Name If you by accidentally used an invalid friendly name you can change it later in the Windows certificate store. Bring up a Run Box Type MMC File | Add/Remove Snap In Add Certificates | Computer Account | Local Computer Drill into Certificates | Personal | Certificates Find your Certificate | Right Click | Properties Edit the Friendly Name | Click OK Backing up your Certificate The first thing you should do once your certificate is successfully installed is to back it up! In case your server crashes or you otherwise lose your configuration this will ensure you have an easy way to recover and reinstall your certificate either on the same server or a different one. If you’re running a server farm or using a wildcard certificate you also need to get the certificate onto other machines and a PFX file import is the easiest way to do this. To back up your certificate select your certificate and choose Export from the context or sidebar menu: The Export Certificate option allows you to export a password protected binary file that you can import in a single step. You can copy the resulting binary PFX file to back up or copy to other machines to install on. Importing the certificate on another machine is as easy as pointing at the PFX file and specifying the password. IIS handles the rest. Assigning a new certificate to your Site Once you have the new certificate installed, all that’s left to do is assign it to your site. In IIS select your Web site and bring up the Site Bindings from the right sidebar. Add a new binding for https, bind it to port 443, specify your hostname and pick the certificate from the pick list. If you’re using a root site make sure to set up your certificate for www.yoursite.com and also for yoursite.com so that both work properly with SSL. Note that you need to explicitly configure each hostname for a certificate if you plan to use SSL. Luckily if you update your SSL certificate in the following year, IIS prompts you and asks whether you like to update all other sites that are using the existing cert to the newer cert. And you’re done. So what’s the Pain? So, all of this is old hat and it doesn’t look all that bad right? So what’s the pain here? Well if you follow the instructions and do everything right, then the process is about as straight forward as you would expect it to be. You create a cert request, you import it and assign it to your sites. That’s the basic steps and to be perfectly fair it works well – if nothing goes wrong. However, renewing tends to be the problem. The first unintuitive issue is that you simply shouldn’t renew but create a new CSR and generate your new certificate from that. Over the years I’ve fallen prey to the belief that Microsoft eventually will fix this so that the renewal creates the same type of CSR as the old cert, but apparently that will just never happen. Booo! The other problem I ran into is that I accidentally misnamed my imported certificate which in turn set off a chain of events that caused my originally issued certificate to become uninstallable. When I received my completed certificate I installed it and it installed just fine, but the friendly name was wrong. As a result IIS refused to assign the certificate to any of my host headered sites. That’s strike number one. Why the heck should the friendly name have any effect on the ability to attach the certificate??? Next I uninstalled the certificate because I figured that would be the easiest way to make sure I get it right. But I found that I could not reinstall my certificate. I kept getting these stop errors: "ASN1 bad tag value met" that would prevent the installation from completion. After searching around for this error and reading countless long messages on forums, I found that this error supposedly does not actually mean the install failed, but the list wouldn’t refresh. Commodo has this to say: Note: There is a known issue in IIS 7 giving the following error: "Cannot find the certificate request associated with this certificate file. A certificate request must be completed on the computer where it was created." You may also receive a message stating "ASN1 bad tag value met". If this is the same server that you generated the CSR on then, in most cases, the certificate is actually installed. Simply cancel the dialog and press "F5" to refresh the list of server certificates. If the new certificate is now in the list, you can continue with the next step. If it is not in the list, you will need to reissue your certificate using a new CSR (see our CSR creation instructions for IIS 7). After creating a new CSR, login to your Comodo account and click the 'replace' button for your certificate. Not sure if this issue is fixed in IIS 8 but that’s an insane bug to have crop up. As it turns out, in my case the refresh didn’t work and the certificate didn’t show up in the IIS list after the reinstall. In fact when looking at the certificate store I could see my certificate was installed in the right place, but the private key is missing which is most likely why IIS is not picking it up. It looks like IIS could not match the final cert to the original CSR generated. But again some sort of message to that affect might be helpful instead of ASN1 bad tag value met. Recovering the Private Key So it turns out my original problem was that I received the published key, but when I imported the private key was missing. There’s a relatively easy way to recover from this. If your certificate doesn’t show up in IIS check in the certificate store for the local machine (see steps above on how to bring this up). If you look at the certificate in Certificates/Personal/Certificates make sure you see the key as shown in the image below: if the key is missing it means that the certificate is missing the private key most likely. To fix a certificate you can do the following: Double click the certificate Go to the Details Tab Copy down the Serial number You can copy the serial number from the area blurred out above. The serial number will be in a format like ?00 a7 9b a1 a4 9d 91 63 57 d6 9f 26 b8 ee 79 b5 cb and you’ll need to strip out the spaces in order to use it in the next step. Next open up an Administrative command prompt and issue the following command: certutil -repairstore my 00a79ba1a49d916357d69f26b8ee79b5cb You should get a confirmation message that the repair worked. If you now go back to the certificate store you should now see the key icon show up on the certificate. Your certificate is fixed. Now go back into IIS Manager and refresh the list of certificates and if all goes well you should see all the certificates that showed in the cert store now: Remember – back up the key first then map to your site… Summary I deal with a lot of customers who run their own IIS servers, and I can’t tell you how often I hear about botched SSL installations. When I posted some of my issues on Twitter yesterday I got a hell storm of “me too” responses. I’m clearly not the only one, who’s run into this especially with renewals. I feel pretty comfortable with IIS configuration and I do a lot of it for support purposes, but the SSL configuration is one that never seems to go seamlessly. This blog post is meant as reminder to myself to read next time I do a renewal. So I can dot my i's and dash my t’s before I get caught in the mess I’m dealing with today. Hopefully some of you find this useful as well.© Rick Strahl, West Wind Technologies, 2005-2014Posted in IIS7  Security   Tweet !function(d,s,id){var js,fjs=d.getElementsByTagName(s)[0];if(!d.getElementById(id)){js=d.createElement(s);js.id=id;js.src="//platform.twitter.com/widgets.js";fjs.parentNode.insertBefore(js,fjs);}}(document,"script","twitter-wjs"); (function() { var po = document.createElement('script'); po.type = 'text/javascript'; po.async = true; po.src = 'https://apis.google.com/js/plusone.js'; var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script')[0]; s.parentNode.insertBefore(po, s); })();

    Read the article

  • Deploy ASP.NET Web Applications with Web Deployment Projects

    - by Ben Griswold
    One may quickly build and deploy an ASP.NET web application via the Publish option in Visual Studio.  This option works great for most simple deployment scenarios but it won’t always cut it.  Let’s say you need to automate your deployments. Or you have environment-specific configuration settings. Or you need to execute pre/post build operations when you do your builds.  If so, you should consider using Web Deployment Projects. The Web Deployment Project type doesn’t come out-of-the-box with Visual Studio 2008.  You’ll need to Download Visual Studio® 2008 Web Deployment Projects – RTW and install if you want to follow along with this tutorial. I’ve created a shiny new ASP.NET MVC project.  Web Deployment Projects work with websites, web applications and MVC projects so feel free to go with any web project type you’d like.  Once your web application is in place, it’s time to add the Web Deployment project.  You can hunt and peck around the File > New > New Project… dialogue as long as you’d like, but you aren’t going to find what you need.  Instead, select the web project and then choose the “Add Web Deployment Project…” hiding behind the Build menu option. I prefer to name my projects based on the environment in which I plan to deploy.  In this case, I’ll be rolling to the QA machine. Don’t expect too much to happen at this point.  A seemingly empty project with a funny icon will be added to your solution.  That’s it. I want to take a minute and talk about configuration settings before we continue.  Some of the common settings which might change from environment to environment are appSettings, connectionStrings and mailSettings.  Here’s a look at my updated web.config: <appSettings>   <add key="MvcApplication293.Url" value="http://localhost:50596/" />     </appSettings> <connectionStrings>   <add name="ApplicationServices"        connectionString="data source=.\SQLEXPRESS;Integrated Security=SSPI;AttachDBFilename=|DataDirectory|aspnetdb.mdf;User Instance=true"        providerName="System.Data.SqlClient"/> </connectionStrings>   <system.net>   <mailSettings>     <smtp from="[email protected]">         <network host="server.com" userName="username" password="password" port="587" defaultCredentials="false"/>     </smtp>   </mailSettings> </system.net> I want to update these values prior to deploying to the QA environment.  There are variations to this approach, but I like to maintain environment-specific settings for each of the web.config sections in the Config/[Environment] project folders.  I’ve provided a screenshot of the QA environment settings below. It may be obvious what one should include in each of the three files.  Basically, it is a copy of the associated web.config section with updated setting values.  For example, the AppSettings.config file may include a reference to the QA web url, the DB.config would include the QA database server and login information and the StmpSettings.config would include a QA Stmp server and user information. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?> <appSettings>   <add key="MvcApplication293.Url" value="http://qa.MvcApplicatinon293.com/" /> </appSettings> AppSettings.config  <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?> <connectionStrings>   <add name="ApplicationServices"        connectionString="server=QAServer;integrated security=SSPI;database=MvcApplication293"        providerName="System.Data.SqlClient"/>   </connectionStrings> Db.config  <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?> <smtp from="[email protected]">     <network host="qaserver.com" userName="qausername" password="qapassword" port="587" defaultCredentials="false"/> </smtp> SmtpSettings.config  I think our web project is ready to deploy.  Now, it’s time to concentrate on the Web Deployment Project itself.  Right-click on the project file and open the Property Pages. The first thing to call out is the Configuration dropdown.  I only deploy a project which is built in Release Mode so I only setup the Web Deployment Project for this mode.  (This is when you change the Configuration selection to “Release.”)  I typically keep the Output Folder default value – .\Release\.  When the application is built, all artifacts will be dropped in the .\Release\ folder relative to the Web Deployment Project root.  The final option may be up for some debate.  I like to roll out updatable websites so I select the “Allow this precompiled site to be updatable” option.  I really do like to follow standard SDLC processes when I release my software but there are those times when you just have to make a hotfix to production and I like to keep this option open if need be.  If you are strongly opposed to this idea, please, by all means, don’t check the box. The next tab is boring.  I don’t like to deploy a crazy number of DLLs so I merge all outputs to a single assembly.  Again, you may have another option and feel free to change this selection if you so wish. If you follow my lead, take care when choosing a single assembly name.  The Assembly Name can not be the same as the website or any other project in your solution otherwise you’ll receive a circular reference build error.  In other words, I can’t name the assembly MvcApplication293 or my output window would start yelling at me. Remember when we called out our QA configuration files?  Click on the Deployment tab and you’ll see how where going to use them.  Notice the Web.config file section replacements value.  All this does is swap called out web.config sections with the content of the Config\QA\* files.  You can reduce or extend this list as you deem fit.  Did you see the “Use external configuration source file” option?  You know how you can point any of your web.config sections to an external file via the configSource attribute?  This option allows you to leverage that technique and instead of replacing the content of the sections, you will replace the configSource attribute value instead. <appSettings configSource="Config\QA\AppSettings.config" /> Go ahead and Apply your changes.  I’d like to take a look at the project file we just updated.  Right-click on the Web Deployment Project and select “Open Project File.” One of the first configuration blocks reflects core Release build settings.  There are a couple of points I’d like to call out here: DebugSymbols=false ensures the compilation debug attribute in your web.config is flipped to false as part of build process.  There’s some crumby (more likely old) documentation which implies you need a ToggleDebugCompilation task to make this happen.  Nope. Just make sure the DebugSymbols is set to false.  EnableUpdateable implies a single dll for the web application rather than a dll for each object and and empty view file. I think updatable applications are cleaner and include the benefit (or risk based on your perspective) that portions of the application can be updated directly on the server.  I called this out earlier but I wanted to reiterate. <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">     <DebugSymbols>false</DebugSymbols>     <OutputPath>.\Release</OutputPath>     <EnableUpdateable>true</EnableUpdateable>     <UseMerge>true</UseMerge>     <SingleAssemblyName>MvcApplication293</SingleAssemblyName>     <DeleteAppCodeCompiledFiles>true</DeleteAppCodeCompiledFiles>     <UseWebConfigReplacement>true</UseWebConfigReplacement>     <ValidateWebConfigReplacement>true</ValidateWebConfigReplacement>     <DeleteAppDataFolder>true</DeleteAppDataFolder>   </PropertyGroup> The next section is self-explanatory.  The content merely reflects the replacement value you provided via the Property Pages. <ItemGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU'">     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\AppSettings.config">       <Section>appSettings</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\Db.config">       <Section>connectionStrings</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\SmtpSettings.config">       <Section>system.net/mailSettings/smtp</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>   </ItemGroup> You’ll want to extend the ItemGroup section to include the files you wish to exclude from the build.  The sample ExcludeFromBuild nodes exclude all obj, svn, csproj, user, pdb artifacts from the build. Enough though they files aren’t included in your web project, you’ll need to exclude them or they’ll show up along with required deployment artifacts.  <ItemGroup Condition="'$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU'">     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\AppSettings.config">       <Section>appSettings</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\Db.config">       <Section>connectionStrings</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>     <WebConfigReplacementFiles Include="Config\QA\SmtpSettings.config">       <Section>system.net/mailSettings/smtp</Section>     </WebConfigReplacementFiles>     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\obj\**\*.*" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\**\.svn\**\*.*" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\**\.svn\**\*" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\**\*.csproj" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\**\*.user" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\bin\*.pdb" />     <ExcludeFromBuild Include="$(SourceWebPhysicalPath)\Notes.txt" />   </ItemGroup> Pre/post build and Pre/post merge tasks are added to the final code block.  By default, your project file should look like the following – a completely commented out section. <!– To modify your build process, add your task inside one of        the targets below and uncomment it. Other similar extension        points exist, see Microsoft.WebDeployment.targets.   <Target Name="BeforeBuild">   </Target>   <Target Name="BeforeMerge">   </Target>   <Target Name="AfterMerge">   </Target>   <Target Name="AfterBuild">   </Target>   –> Update the section to remove all temporary Config folders and files after the build.  <!– To modify your build process, add your task inside one of        the targets below and uncomment it. Other similar extension        points exist, see Microsoft.WebDeployment.targets.     <Target Name="BeforeMerge">   </Target>   <Target Name="AfterMerge">   </Target>     <Target Name="BeforeBuild">      </Target>       –>   <Target Name="AfterBuild">     <!– WebConfigReplacement requires the Config files. Remove after build. –>     <RemoveDir Directories="$(OutputPath)\Config" />   </Target> That’s it for setup.  Save the project file, flip the solution to Release Mode and build.  If there’s an issue, consult the Output window for details.  If all went well, you will find your deployment artifacts in your Web Deployment Project folder like so. Both the code source and published application will be there. Inside the Release folder you will find your “published files” and you’ll notice the Config folder is no where to be found.  In the Source folder, all project files are found with the exception of the items which were excluded from the build. I’ll wrap up this tutorial by calling out a little Web Deployment pet peeve of mine: there doesn’t appear to be a way to add an existing web deployment project to a solution.  The best I can come up with is create a new web deployment project and then copy and paste the contents of the existing project file into the new project file.  It’s not a big deal but it bugs me. Download the Solution

    Read the article

  • Creating a dynamic proxy generator with c# – Part 3 – Creating the constructors

    - by SeanMcAlinden
    Creating a dynamic proxy generator with c# – Part 1 – Creating the Assembly builder, Module builder and caching mechanism Creating a dynamic proxy generator with c# – Part 2 – Interceptor Design For the latest code go to http://rapidioc.codeplex.com/ When building our proxy type, the first thing we need to do is build the constructors. There needs to be a corresponding constructor for each constructor on the passed in base type. We also want to create a field to store the interceptors and construct this list within each constructor. So assuming the passed in base type is a User<int, IRepository> class, were looking to generate constructor code like the following:   Default Constructor public User`2_RapidDynamicBaseProxy() {     this.interceptors = new List<IInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>>>();     DefaultInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>> item = new DefaultInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>>();     this.interceptors.Add(item); }     Parameterised Constructor public User`2_RapidDynamicBaseProxy(IRepository repository1) : base(repository1) {     this.interceptors = new List<IInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>>>();     DefaultInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>> item = new DefaultInterceptor<User<int, IRepository>>();     this.interceptors.Add(item); }   As you can see, we first populate a field on the class with a new list of the passed in base type. Construct our DefaultInterceptor class. Add the DefaultInterceptor instance to our interceptor collection. Although this seems like a relatively small task, there is a fair amount of work require to get this going. Instead of going through every line of code – please download the latest from http://rapidioc.codeplex.com/ and debug through. In this post I’m going to concentrate on explaining how it works. TypeBuilder The TypeBuilder class is the main class used to create the type. You instantiate a new TypeBuilder using the assembly module we created in part 1. /// <summary> /// Creates a type builder. /// </summary> /// <typeparam name="TBase">The type of the base class to be proxied.</typeparam> public static TypeBuilder CreateTypeBuilder<TBase>() where TBase : class {     TypeBuilder typeBuilder = DynamicModuleCache.Get.DefineType         (             CreateTypeName<TBase>(),             TypeAttributes.Class | TypeAttributes.Public,             typeof(TBase),             new Type[] { typeof(IProxy) }         );       if (typeof(TBase).IsGenericType)     {         GenericsHelper.MakeGenericType(typeof(TBase), typeBuilder);     }       return typeBuilder; }   private static string CreateTypeName<TBase>() where TBase : class {     return string.Format("{0}_RapidDynamicBaseProxy", typeof(TBase).Name); } As you can see, I’ve create a new public class derived from TBase which also implements my IProxy interface, this is used later for adding interceptors. If the base type is generic, the following GenericsHelper.MakeGenericType method is called. GenericsHelper using System; using System.Reflection.Emit; namespace Rapid.DynamicProxy.Types.Helpers {     /// <summary>     /// Helper class for generic types and methods.     /// </summary>     internal static class GenericsHelper     {         /// <summary>         /// Makes the typeBuilder a generic.         /// </summary>         /// <param name="concrete">The concrete.</param>         /// <param name="typeBuilder">The type builder.</param>         public static void MakeGenericType(Type baseType, TypeBuilder typeBuilder)         {             Type[] genericArguments = baseType.GetGenericArguments();               string[] genericArgumentNames = GetArgumentNames(genericArguments);               GenericTypeParameterBuilder[] genericTypeParameterBuilder                 = typeBuilder.DefineGenericParameters(genericArgumentNames);               typeBuilder.MakeGenericType(genericTypeParameterBuilder);         }           /// <summary>         /// Gets the argument names from an array of generic argument types.         /// </summary>         /// <param name="genericArguments">The generic arguments.</param>         public static string[] GetArgumentNames(Type[] genericArguments)         {             string[] genericArgumentNames = new string[genericArguments.Length];               for (int i = 0; i < genericArguments.Length; i++)             {                 genericArgumentNames[i] = genericArguments[i].Name;             }               return genericArgumentNames;         }     } }       As you can see, I’m getting all of the generic argument types and names, creating a GenericTypeParameterBuilder and then using the typeBuilder to make the new type generic. InterceptorsField The interceptors field will store a List<IInterceptor<TBase>>. Fields are simple made using the FieldBuilder class. The following code demonstrates how to create the interceptor field. FieldBuilder interceptorsField = typeBuilder.DefineField(     "interceptors",     typeof(System.Collections.Generic.List<>).MakeGenericType(typeof(IInterceptor<TBase>)),       FieldAttributes.Private     ); The field will now exist with the new Type although it currently has no data – we’ll deal with this in the constructor. Add method for interceptorsField To enable us to add to the interceptorsField list, we are going to utilise the Add method that already exists within the System.Collections.Generic.List class. We still however have to create the methodInfo necessary to call the add method. This can be done similar to the following: Add Interceptor Field MethodInfo addInterceptor = typeof(List<>)     .MakeGenericType(new Type[] { typeof(IInterceptor<>).MakeGenericType(typeof(TBase)) })     .GetMethod     (        "Add",        BindingFlags.Instance | BindingFlags.Public | BindingFlags.NonPublic,        null,        new Type[] { typeof(IInterceptor<>).MakeGenericType(typeof(TBase)) },        null     ); So we’ve create a List<IInterceptor<TBase>> type, then using the type created a method info called Add which accepts an IInterceptor<TBase>. Now in our constructor we can use this to call this.interceptors.Add(// interceptor); Building the Constructors This will be the first hard-core part of the proxy building process so I’m going to show the class and then try to explain what everything is doing. For a clear view, download the source from http://rapidioc.codeplex.com/, go to the test project and debug through the constructor building section. Anyway, here it is: DynamicConstructorBuilder using System; using System.Collections.Generic; using System.Reflection; using System.Reflection.Emit; using Rapid.DynamicProxy.Interception; using Rapid.DynamicProxy.Types.Helpers; namespace Rapid.DynamicProxy.Types.Constructors {     /// <summary>     /// Class for creating the proxy constructors.     /// </summary>     internal static class DynamicConstructorBuilder     {         /// <summary>         /// Builds the constructors.         /// </summary>         /// <typeparam name="TBase">The base type.</typeparam>         /// <param name="typeBuilder">The type builder.</param>         /// <param name="interceptorsField">The interceptors field.</param>         public static void BuildConstructors<TBase>             (                 TypeBuilder typeBuilder,                 FieldBuilder interceptorsField,                 MethodInfo addInterceptor             )             where TBase : class         {             ConstructorInfo interceptorsFieldConstructor = CreateInterceptorsFieldConstructor<TBase>();               ConstructorInfo defaultInterceptorConstructor = CreateDefaultInterceptorConstructor<TBase>();               ConstructorInfo[] constructors = typeof(TBase).GetConstructors();               foreach (ConstructorInfo constructorInfo in constructors)             {                 CreateConstructor<TBase>                     (                         typeBuilder,                         interceptorsField,                         interceptorsFieldConstructor,                         defaultInterceptorConstructor,                         addInterceptor,                         constructorInfo                     );             }         }           #region Private Methods           private static void CreateConstructor<TBase>             (                 TypeBuilder typeBuilder,                 FieldBuilder interceptorsField,                 ConstructorInfo interceptorsFieldConstructor,                 ConstructorInfo defaultInterceptorConstructor,                 MethodInfo AddDefaultInterceptor,                 ConstructorInfo constructorInfo             ) where TBase : class         {             Type[] parameterTypes = GetParameterTypes(constructorInfo);               ConstructorBuilder constructorBuilder = CreateConstructorBuilder(typeBuilder, parameterTypes);               ILGenerator cIL = constructorBuilder.GetILGenerator();               LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable =                 cIL.DeclareLocal(typeof(DefaultInterceptor<>).MakeGenericType(typeof(TBase)));               ConstructInterceptorsField(interceptorsField, interceptorsFieldConstructor, cIL);               ConstructDefaultInterceptor(defaultInterceptorConstructor, cIL, defaultInterceptorMethodVariable);               AddDefaultInterceptorToInterceptorsList                 (                     interceptorsField,                     AddDefaultInterceptor,                     cIL,                     defaultInterceptorMethodVariable                 );               CreateConstructor(constructorInfo, parameterTypes, cIL);         }           private static void CreateConstructor(ConstructorInfo constructorInfo, Type[] parameterTypes, ILGenerator cIL)         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);               if (parameterTypes.Length > 0)             {                 LoadParameterTypes(parameterTypes, cIL);             }               cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Call, constructorInfo);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ret);         }           private static void LoadParameterTypes(Type[] parameterTypes, ILGenerator cIL)         {             for (int i = 1; i <= parameterTypes.Length; i++)             {                 cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_S, i);             }         }           private static void AddDefaultInterceptorToInterceptorsList             (                 FieldBuilder interceptorsField,                 MethodInfo AddDefaultInterceptor,                 ILGenerator cIL,                 LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable             )         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldfld, interceptorsField);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldloc, defaultInterceptorMethodVariable);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Callvirt, AddDefaultInterceptor);         }           private static void ConstructDefaultInterceptor             (                 ConstructorInfo defaultInterceptorConstructor,                 ILGenerator cIL,                 LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable             )         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Newobj, defaultInterceptorConstructor);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Stloc, defaultInterceptorMethodVariable);         }           private static void ConstructInterceptorsField             (                 FieldBuilder interceptorsField,                 ConstructorInfo interceptorsFieldConstructor,                 ILGenerator cIL             )         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Newobj, interceptorsFieldConstructor);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Stfld, interceptorsField);         }           private static ConstructorBuilder CreateConstructorBuilder(TypeBuilder typeBuilder, Type[] parameterTypes)         {             return typeBuilder.DefineConstructor                 (                     MethodAttributes.Public | MethodAttributes.SpecialName | MethodAttributes.RTSpecialName                     | MethodAttributes.HideBySig, CallingConventions.Standard, parameterTypes                 );         }           private static Type[] GetParameterTypes(ConstructorInfo constructorInfo)         {             ParameterInfo[] parameterInfoArray = constructorInfo.GetParameters();               Type[] parameterTypes = new Type[parameterInfoArray.Length];               for (int p = 0; p < parameterInfoArray.Length; p++)             {                 parameterTypes[p] = parameterInfoArray[p].ParameterType;             }               return parameterTypes;         }           private static ConstructorInfo CreateInterceptorsFieldConstructor<TBase>() where TBase : class         {             return ConstructorHelper.CreateGenericConstructorInfo                 (                     typeof(List<>),                     new Type[] { typeof(IInterceptor<TBase>) },                     BindingFlags.Instance | BindingFlags.Public | BindingFlags.NonPublic                 );         }           private static ConstructorInfo CreateDefaultInterceptorConstructor<TBase>() where TBase : class         {             return ConstructorHelper.CreateGenericConstructorInfo                 (                     typeof(DefaultInterceptor<>),                     new Type[] { typeof(TBase) },                     BindingFlags.Instance | BindingFlags.Public | BindingFlags.NonPublic                 );         }           #endregion     } } So, the first two tasks within the class should be fairly clear, we are creating a ConstructorInfo for the interceptorField list and a ConstructorInfo for the DefaultConstructor, this is for instantiating them in each contructor. We then using Reflection get an array of all of the constructors in the base class, we then loop through the array and create a corresponding proxy contructor. Hopefully, the code is fairly easy to follow other than some new types and the dreaded Opcodes. ConstructorBuilder This class defines a new constructor on the type. ILGenerator The ILGenerator allows the use of Reflection.Emit to create the method body. LocalBuilder The local builder allows the storage of data in local variables within a method, in this case it’s the constructed DefaultInterceptor. Constructing the interceptors field The first bit of IL you’ll come across as you follow through the code is the following private method used for constructing the field list of interceptors. private static void ConstructInterceptorsField             (                 FieldBuilder interceptorsField,                 ConstructorInfo interceptorsFieldConstructor,                 ILGenerator cIL             )         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Newobj, interceptorsFieldConstructor);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Stfld, interceptorsField);         } The first thing to know about generating code using IL is that you are using a stack, if you want to use something, you need to push it up the stack etc. etc. OpCodes.ldArg_0 This opcode is a really interesting one, basically each method has a hidden first argument of the containing class instance (apart from static classes), constructors are no different. This is the reason you can use syntax like this.myField. So back to the method, as we want to instantiate the List in the interceptorsField, first we need to load the class instance onto the stack, we then load the new object (new List<TBase>) and finally we store it in the interceptorsField. Hopefully, that should follow easily enough in the method. In each constructor you would now have this.interceptors = new List<User<int, IRepository>>(); Constructing and storing the DefaultInterceptor The next bit of code we need to create is the constructed DefaultInterceptor. Firstly, we create a local builder to store the constructed type. Create a local builder LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable =     cIL.DeclareLocal(typeof(DefaultInterceptor<>).MakeGenericType(typeof(TBase))); Once our local builder is ready, we then need to construct the DefaultInterceptor<TBase> and store it in the variable. Connstruct DefaultInterceptor private static void ConstructDefaultInterceptor     (         ConstructorInfo defaultInterceptorConstructor,         ILGenerator cIL,         LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable     ) {     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Newobj, defaultInterceptorConstructor);     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Stloc, defaultInterceptorMethodVariable); } As you can see, using the ConstructorInfo named defaultInterceptorConstructor, we load the new object onto the stack. Then using the store local opcode (OpCodes.Stloc), we store the new object in the local builder named defaultInterceptorMethodVariable. Add the constructed DefaultInterceptor to the interceptors field collection Using the add method created earlier in this post, we are going to add the new DefaultInterceptor object to the interceptors field collection. Add Default Interceptor private static void AddDefaultInterceptorToInterceptorsList     (         FieldBuilder interceptorsField,         MethodInfo AddDefaultInterceptor,         ILGenerator cIL,         LocalBuilder defaultInterceptorMethodVariable     ) {     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldfld, interceptorsField);     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldloc, defaultInterceptorMethodVariable);     cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Callvirt, AddDefaultInterceptor); } So, here’s whats going on. The class instance is first loaded onto the stack using the load argument at index 0 opcode (OpCodes.Ldarg_0) (remember the first arg is the hidden class instance). The interceptorsField is then loaded onto the stack using the load field opcode (OpCodes.Ldfld). We then load the DefaultInterceptor object we stored locally using the load local opcode (OpCodes.Ldloc). Then finally we call the AddDefaultInterceptor method using the call virtual opcode (Opcodes.Callvirt). Completing the constructor The last thing we need to do is complete the constructor. Complete the constructor private static void CreateConstructor(ConstructorInfo constructorInfo, Type[] parameterTypes, ILGenerator cIL)         {             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_0);               if (parameterTypes.Length > 0)             {                 LoadParameterTypes(parameterTypes, cIL);             }               cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Call, constructorInfo);             cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ret);         }           private static void LoadParameterTypes(Type[] parameterTypes, ILGenerator cIL)         {             for (int i = 1; i <= parameterTypes.Length; i++)             {                 cIL.Emit(OpCodes.Ldarg_S, i);             }         } So, the first thing we do again is load the class instance using the load argument at index 0 opcode (OpCodes.Ldarg_0). We then load each parameter using OpCode.Ldarg_S, this opcode allows us to specify an index position for each argument. We then setup calling the base constructor using OpCodes.Call and the base constructors ConstructorInfo. Finally, all methods are required to return, even when they have a void return. As there are no values on the stack after the OpCodes.Call line, we can safely call the OpCode.Ret to give the constructor a void return. If there was a value, we would have to pop the value of the stack before calling return otherwise, the method would try and return a value. Conclusion This was a slightly hardcore post but hopefully it hasn’t been too hard to follow. The main thing is that a number of the really useful opcodes have been used and now the dynamic proxy is capable of being constructed. If you download the code and debug through the tests at http://rapidioc.codeplex.com/, you’ll be able to create proxies at this point, they cannon do anything in terms of interception but you can happily run the tests, call base methods and properties and also take a look at the created assembly in Reflector. Hope this is useful. The next post should be up soon, it will be covering creating the private methods for calling the base class methods and properties. Kind Regards, Sean.

    Read the article

  • Improving Partitioned Table Join Performance

    - by Paul White
    The query optimizer does not always choose an optimal strategy when joining partitioned tables. This post looks at an example, showing how a manual rewrite of the query can almost double performance, while reducing the memory grant to almost nothing. Test Data The two tables in this example use a common partitioning partition scheme. The partition function uses 41 equal-size partitions: CREATE PARTITION FUNCTION PFT (integer) AS RANGE RIGHT FOR VALUES ( 125000, 250000, 375000, 500000, 625000, 750000, 875000, 1000000, 1125000, 1250000, 1375000, 1500000, 1625000, 1750000, 1875000, 2000000, 2125000, 2250000, 2375000, 2500000, 2625000, 2750000, 2875000, 3000000, 3125000, 3250000, 3375000, 3500000, 3625000, 3750000, 3875000, 4000000, 4125000, 4250000, 4375000, 4500000, 4625000, 4750000, 4875000, 5000000 ); GO CREATE PARTITION SCHEME PST AS PARTITION PFT ALL TO ([PRIMARY]); There two tables are: CREATE TABLE dbo.T1 ( TID integer NOT NULL IDENTITY(0,1), Column1 integer NOT NULL, Padding binary(100) NOT NULL DEFAULT 0x,   CONSTRAINT PK_T1 PRIMARY KEY CLUSTERED (TID) ON PST (TID) );   CREATE TABLE dbo.T2 ( TID integer NOT NULL, Column1 integer NOT NULL, Padding binary(100) NOT NULL DEFAULT 0x,   CONSTRAINT PK_T2 PRIMARY KEY CLUSTERED (TID, Column1) ON PST (TID) ); The next script loads 5 million rows into T1 with a pseudo-random value between 1 and 5 for Column1. The table is partitioned on the IDENTITY column TID: INSERT dbo.T1 WITH (TABLOCKX) (Column1) SELECT (ABS(CHECKSUM(NEWID())) % 5) + 1 FROM dbo.Numbers AS N WHERE n BETWEEN 1 AND 5000000; In case you don’t already have an auxiliary table of numbers lying around, here’s a script to create one with 10 million rows: CREATE TABLE dbo.Numbers (n bigint PRIMARY KEY);   WITH L0 AS(SELECT 1 AS c UNION ALL SELECT 1), L1 AS(SELECT 1 AS c FROM L0 AS A CROSS JOIN L0 AS B), L2 AS(SELECT 1 AS c FROM L1 AS A CROSS JOIN L1 AS B), L3 AS(SELECT 1 AS c FROM L2 AS A CROSS JOIN L2 AS B), L4 AS(SELECT 1 AS c FROM L3 AS A CROSS JOIN L3 AS B), L5 AS(SELECT 1 AS c FROM L4 AS A CROSS JOIN L4 AS B), Nums AS(SELECT ROW_NUMBER() OVER (ORDER BY (SELECT NULL)) AS n FROM L5) INSERT dbo.Numbers WITH (TABLOCKX) SELECT TOP (10000000) n FROM Nums ORDER BY n OPTION (MAXDOP 1); Table T1 contains data like this: Next we load data into table T2. The relationship between the two tables is that table 2 contains ‘n’ rows for each row in table 1, where ‘n’ is determined by the value in Column1 of table T1. There is nothing particularly special about the data or distribution, by the way. INSERT dbo.T2 WITH (TABLOCKX) (TID, Column1) SELECT T.TID, N.n FROM dbo.T1 AS T JOIN dbo.Numbers AS N ON N.n >= 1 AND N.n <= T.Column1; Table T2 ends up containing about 15 million rows: The primary key for table T2 is a combination of TID and Column1. The data is partitioned according to the value in column TID alone. Partition Distribution The following query shows the number of rows in each partition of table T1: SELECT PartitionID = CA1.P, NumRows = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T CROSS APPLY (VALUES ($PARTITION.PFT(TID))) AS CA1 (P) GROUP BY CA1.P ORDER BY CA1.P; There are 40 partitions containing 125,000 rows (40 * 125k = 5m rows). The rightmost partition remains empty. The next query shows the distribution for table 2: SELECT PartitionID = CA1.P, NumRows = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T2 AS T CROSS APPLY (VALUES ($PARTITION.PFT(TID))) AS CA1 (P) GROUP BY CA1.P ORDER BY CA1.P; There are roughly 375,000 rows in each partition (the rightmost partition is also empty): Ok, that’s the test data done. Test Query and Execution Plan The task is to count the rows resulting from joining tables 1 and 2 on the TID column: SET STATISTICS IO ON; DECLARE @s datetime2 = SYSUTCDATETIME();   SELECT COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID;   SELECT DATEDIFF(Millisecond, @s, SYSUTCDATETIME()); SET STATISTICS IO OFF; The optimizer chooses a plan using parallel hash join, and partial aggregation: The Plan Explorer plan tree view shows accurate cardinality estimates and an even distribution of rows across threads (click to enlarge the image): With a warm data cache, the STATISTICS IO output shows that no physical I/O was needed, and all 41 partitions were touched: Running the query without actual execution plan or STATISTICS IO information for maximum performance, the query returns in around 2600ms. Execution Plan Analysis The first step toward improving on the execution plan produced by the query optimizer is to understand how it works, at least in outline. The two parallel Clustered Index Scans use multiple threads to read rows from tables T1 and T2. Parallel scan uses a demand-based scheme where threads are given page(s) to scan from the table as needed. This arrangement has certain important advantages, but does result in an unpredictable distribution of rows amongst threads. The point is that multiple threads cooperate to scan the whole table, but it is impossible to predict which rows end up on which threads. For correct results from the parallel hash join, the execution plan has to ensure that rows from T1 and T2 that might join are processed on the same thread. For example, if a row from T1 with join key value ‘1234’ is placed in thread 5’s hash table, the execution plan must guarantee that any rows from T2 that also have join key value ‘1234’ probe thread 5’s hash table for matches. The way this guarantee is enforced in this parallel hash join plan is by repartitioning rows to threads after each parallel scan. The two repartitioning exchanges route rows to threads using a hash function over the hash join keys. The two repartitioning exchanges use the same hash function so rows from T1 and T2 with the same join key must end up on the same hash join thread. Expensive Exchanges This business of repartitioning rows between threads can be very expensive, especially if a large number of rows is involved. The execution plan selected by the optimizer moves 5 million rows through one repartitioning exchange and around 15 million across the other. As a first step toward removing these exchanges, consider the execution plan selected by the optimizer if we join just one partition from each table, disallowing parallelism: SELECT COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID WHERE $PARTITION.PFT(T1.TID) = 1 AND $PARTITION.PFT(T2.TID) = 1 OPTION (MAXDOP 1); The optimizer has chosen a (one-to-many) merge join instead of a hash join. The single-partition query completes in around 100ms. If everything scaled linearly, we would expect that extending this strategy to all 40 populated partitions would result in an execution time around 4000ms. Using parallelism could reduce that further, perhaps to be competitive with the parallel hash join chosen by the optimizer. This raises a question. If the most efficient way to join one partition from each of the tables is to use a merge join, why does the optimizer not choose a merge join for the full query? Forcing a Merge Join Let’s force the optimizer to use a merge join on the test query using a hint: SELECT COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID OPTION (MERGE JOIN); This is the execution plan selected by the optimizer: This plan results in the same number of logical reads reported previously, but instead of 2600ms the query takes 5000ms. The natural explanation for this drop in performance is that the merge join plan is only using a single thread, whereas the parallel hash join plan could use multiple threads. Parallel Merge Join We can get a parallel merge join plan using the same query hint as before, and adding trace flag 8649: SELECT COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID OPTION (MERGE JOIN, QUERYTRACEON 8649); The execution plan is: This looks promising. It uses a similar strategy to distribute work across threads as seen for the parallel hash join. In practice though, performance is disappointing. On a typical run, the parallel merge plan runs for around 8400ms; slower than the single-threaded merge join plan (5000ms) and much worse than the 2600ms for the parallel hash join. We seem to be going backwards! The logical reads for the parallel merge are still exactly the same as before, with no physical IOs. The cardinality estimates and thread distribution are also still very good (click to enlarge): A big clue to the reason for the poor performance is shown in the wait statistics (captured by Plan Explorer Pro): CXPACKET waits require careful interpretation, and are most often benign, but in this case excessive waiting occurs at the repartitioning exchanges. Unlike the parallel hash join, the repartitioning exchanges in this plan are order-preserving ‘merging’ exchanges (because merge join requires ordered inputs): Parallelism works best when threads can just grab any available unit of work and get on with processing it. Preserving order introduces inter-thread dependencies that can easily lead to significant waits occurring. In extreme cases, these dependencies can result in an intra-query deadlock, though the details of that will have to wait for another time to explore in detail. The potential for waits and deadlocks leads the query optimizer to cost parallel merge join relatively highly, especially as the degree of parallelism (DOP) increases. This high costing resulted in the optimizer choosing a serial merge join rather than parallel in this case. The test results certainly confirm its reasoning. Collocated Joins In SQL Server 2008 and later, the optimizer has another available strategy when joining tables that share a common partition scheme. This strategy is a collocated join, also known as as a per-partition join. It can be applied in both serial and parallel execution plans, though it is limited to 2-way joins in the current optimizer. Whether the optimizer chooses a collocated join or not depends on cost estimation. The primary benefits of a collocated join are that it eliminates an exchange and requires less memory, as we will see next. Costing and Plan Selection The query optimizer did consider a collocated join for our original query, but it was rejected on cost grounds. The parallel hash join with repartitioning exchanges appeared to be a cheaper option. There is no query hint to force a collocated join, so we have to mess with the costing framework to produce one for our test query. Pretending that IOs cost 50 times more than usual is enough to convince the optimizer to use collocated join with our test query: -- Pretend IOs are 50x cost temporarily DBCC SETIOWEIGHT(50);   -- Co-located hash join SELECT COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID OPTION (RECOMPILE);   -- Reset IO costing DBCC SETIOWEIGHT(1); Collocated Join Plan The estimated execution plan for the collocated join is: The Constant Scan contains one row for each partition of the shared partitioning scheme, from 1 to 41. The hash repartitioning exchanges seen previously are replaced by a single Distribute Streams exchange using Demand partitioning. Demand partitioning means that the next partition id is given to the next parallel thread that asks for one. My test machine has eight logical processors, and all are available for SQL Server to use. As a result, there are eight threads in the single parallel branch in this plan, each processing one partition from each table at a time. Once a thread finishes processing a partition, it grabs a new partition number from the Distribute Streams exchange…and so on until all partitions have been processed. It is important to understand that the parallel scans in this plan are different from the parallel hash join plan. Although the scans have the same parallelism icon, tables T1 and T2 are not being co-operatively scanned by multiple threads in the same way. Each thread reads a single partition of T1 and performs a hash match join with the same partition from table T2. The properties of the two Clustered Index Scans show a Seek Predicate (unusual for a scan!) limiting the rows to a single partition: The crucial point is that the join between T1 and T2 is on TID, and TID is the partitioning column for both tables. A thread that processes partition ‘n’ is guaranteed to see all rows that can possibly join on TID for that partition. In addition, no other thread will see rows from that partition, so this removes the need for repartitioning exchanges. CPU and Memory Efficiency Improvements The collocated join has removed two expensive repartitioning exchanges and added a single exchange processing 41 rows (one for each partition id). Remember, the parallel hash join plan exchanges had to process 5 million and 15 million rows. The amount of processor time spent on exchanges will be much lower in the collocated join plan. In addition, the collocated join plan has a maximum of 8 threads processing single partitions at any one time. The 41 partitions will all be processed eventually, but a new partition is not started until a thread asks for it. Threads can reuse hash table memory for the new partition. The parallel hash join plan also had 8 hash tables, but with all 5,000,000 build rows loaded at the same time. The collocated plan needs memory for only 8 * 125,000 = 1,000,000 rows at any one time. Collocated Hash Join Performance The collated join plan has disappointing performance in this case. The query runs for around 25,300ms despite the same IO statistics as usual. This is much the worst result so far, so what went wrong? It turns out that cardinality estimation for the single partition scans of table T1 is slightly low. The properties of the Clustered Index Scan of T1 (graphic immediately above) show the estimation was for 121,951 rows. This is a small shortfall compared with the 125,000 rows actually encountered, but it was enough to cause the hash join to spill to physical tempdb: A level 1 spill doesn’t sound too bad, until you realize that the spill to tempdb probably occurs for each of the 41 partitions. As a side note, the cardinality estimation error is a little surprising because the system tables accurately show there are 125,000 rows in every partition of T1. Unfortunately, the optimizer uses regular column and index statistics to derive cardinality estimates here rather than system table information (e.g. sys.partitions). Collocated Merge Join We will never know how well the collocated parallel hash join plan might have worked without the cardinality estimation error (and the resulting 41 spills to tempdb) but we do know: Merge join does not require a memory grant; and Merge join was the optimizer’s preferred join option for a single partition join Putting this all together, what we would really like to see is the same collocated join strategy, but using merge join instead of hash join. Unfortunately, the current query optimizer cannot produce a collocated merge join; it only knows how to do collocated hash join. So where does this leave us? CROSS APPLY sys.partitions We can try to write our own collocated join query. We can use sys.partitions to find the partition numbers, and CROSS APPLY to get a count per partition, with a final step to sum the partial counts. The following query implements this idea: SELECT row_count = SUM(Subtotals.cnt) FROM ( -- Partition numbers SELECT p.partition_number FROM sys.partitions AS p WHERE p.[object_id] = OBJECT_ID(N'T1', N'U') AND p.index_id = 1 ) AS P CROSS APPLY ( -- Count per collocated join SELECT cnt = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID WHERE $PARTITION.PFT(T1.TID) = p.partition_number AND $PARTITION.PFT(T2.TID) = p.partition_number ) AS SubTotals; The estimated plan is: The cardinality estimates aren’t all that good here, especially the estimate for the scan of the system table underlying the sys.partitions view. Nevertheless, the plan shape is heading toward where we would like to be. Each partition number from the system table results in a per-partition scan of T1 and T2, a one-to-many Merge Join, and a Stream Aggregate to compute the partial counts. The final Stream Aggregate just sums the partial counts. Execution time for this query is around 3,500ms, with the same IO statistics as always. This compares favourably with 5,000ms for the serial plan produced by the optimizer with the OPTION (MERGE JOIN) hint. This is another case of the sum of the parts being less than the whole – summing 41 partial counts from 41 single-partition merge joins is faster than a single merge join and count over all partitions. Even so, this single-threaded collocated merge join is not as quick as the original parallel hash join plan, which executed in 2,600ms. On the positive side, our collocated merge join uses only one logical processor and requires no memory grant. The parallel hash join plan used 16 threads and reserved 569 MB of memory:   Using a Temporary Table Our collocated merge join plan should benefit from parallelism. The reason parallelism is not being used is that the query references a system table. We can work around that by writing the partition numbers to a temporary table (or table variable): SET STATISTICS IO ON; DECLARE @s datetime2 = SYSUTCDATETIME();   CREATE TABLE #P ( partition_number integer PRIMARY KEY);   INSERT #P (partition_number) SELECT p.partition_number FROM sys.partitions AS p WHERE p.[object_id] = OBJECT_ID(N'T1', N'U') AND p.index_id = 1;   SELECT row_count = SUM(Subtotals.cnt) FROM #P AS p CROSS APPLY ( SELECT cnt = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID WHERE $PARTITION.PFT(T1.TID) = p.partition_number AND $PARTITION.PFT(T2.TID) = p.partition_number ) AS SubTotals;   DROP TABLE #P;   SELECT DATEDIFF(Millisecond, @s, SYSUTCDATETIME()); SET STATISTICS IO OFF; Using the temporary table adds a few logical reads, but the overall execution time is still around 3500ms, indistinguishable from the same query without the temporary table. The problem is that the query optimizer still doesn’t choose a parallel plan for this query, though the removal of the system table reference means that it could if it chose to: In fact the optimizer did enter the parallel plan phase of query optimization (running search 1 for a second time): Unfortunately, the parallel plan found seemed to be more expensive than the serial plan. This is a crazy result, caused by the optimizer’s cost model not reducing operator CPU costs on the inner side of a nested loops join. Don’t get me started on that, we’ll be here all night. In this plan, everything expensive happens on the inner side of a nested loops join. Without a CPU cost reduction to compensate for the added cost of exchange operators, candidate parallel plans always look more expensive to the optimizer than the equivalent serial plan. Parallel Collocated Merge Join We can produce the desired parallel plan using trace flag 8649 again: SELECT row_count = SUM(Subtotals.cnt) FROM #P AS p CROSS APPLY ( SELECT cnt = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID WHERE $PARTITION.PFT(T1.TID) = p.partition_number AND $PARTITION.PFT(T2.TID) = p.partition_number ) AS SubTotals OPTION (QUERYTRACEON 8649); The actual execution plan is: One difference between this plan and the collocated hash join plan is that a Repartition Streams exchange operator is used instead of Distribute Streams. The effect is similar, though not quite identical. The Repartition uses round-robin partitioning, meaning the next partition id is pushed to the next thread in sequence. The Distribute Streams exchange seen earlier used Demand partitioning, meaning the next partition id is pulled across the exchange by the next thread that is ready for more work. There are subtle performance implications for each partitioning option, but going into that would again take us too far off the main point of this post. Performance The important thing is the performance of this parallel collocated merge join – just 1350ms on a typical run. The list below shows all the alternatives from this post (all timings include creation, population, and deletion of the temporary table where appropriate) from quickest to slowest: Collocated parallel merge join: 1350ms Parallel hash join: 2600ms Collocated serial merge join: 3500ms Serial merge join: 5000ms Parallel merge join: 8400ms Collated parallel hash join: 25,300ms (hash spill per partition) The parallel collocated merge join requires no memory grant (aside from a paltry 1.2MB used for exchange buffers). This plan uses 16 threads at DOP 8; but 8 of those are (rather pointlessly) allocated to the parallel scan of the temporary table. These are minor concerns, but it turns out there is a way to address them if it bothers you. Parallel Collocated Merge Join with Demand Partitioning This final tweak replaces the temporary table with a hard-coded list of partition ids (dynamic SQL could be used to generate this query from sys.partitions): SELECT row_count = SUM(Subtotals.cnt) FROM ( VALUES (1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7),(8),(9),(10), (11),(12),(13),(14),(15),(16),(17),(18),(19),(20), (21),(22),(23),(24),(25),(26),(27),(28),(29),(30), (31),(32),(33),(34),(35),(36),(37),(38),(39),(40),(41) ) AS P (partition_number) CROSS APPLY ( SELECT cnt = COUNT_BIG(*) FROM dbo.T1 AS T1 JOIN dbo.T2 AS T2 ON T2.TID = T1.TID WHERE $PARTITION.PFT(T1.TID) = p.partition_number AND $PARTITION.PFT(T2.TID) = p.partition_number ) AS SubTotals OPTION (QUERYTRACEON 8649); The actual execution plan is: The parallel collocated hash join plan is reproduced below for comparison: The manual rewrite has another advantage that has not been mentioned so far: the partial counts (per partition) can be computed earlier than the partial counts (per thread) in the optimizer’s collocated join plan. The earlier aggregation is performed by the extra Stream Aggregate under the nested loops join. The performance of the parallel collocated merge join is unchanged at around 1350ms. Final Words It is a shame that the current query optimizer does not consider a collocated merge join (Connect item closed as Won’t Fix). The example used in this post showed an improvement in execution time from 2600ms to 1350ms using a modestly-sized data set and limited parallelism. In addition, the memory requirement for the query was almost completely eliminated  – down from 569MB to 1.2MB. The problem with the parallel hash join selected by the optimizer is that it attempts to process the full data set all at once (albeit using eight threads). It requires a large memory grant to hold all 5 million rows from table T1 across the eight hash tables, and does not take advantage of the divide-and-conquer opportunity offered by the common partitioning. The great thing about the collocated join strategies is that each parallel thread works on a single partition from both tables, reading rows, performing the join, and computing a per-partition subtotal, before moving on to a new partition. From a thread’s point of view… If you have trouble visualizing what is happening from just looking at the parallel collocated merge join execution plan, let’s look at it again, but from the point of view of just one thread operating between the two Parallelism (exchange) operators. Our thread picks up a single partition id from the Distribute Streams exchange, and starts a merge join using ordered rows from partition 1 of table T1 and partition 1 of table T2. By definition, this is all happening on a single thread. As rows join, they are added to a (per-partition) count in the Stream Aggregate immediately above the Merge Join. Eventually, either T1 (partition 1) or T2 (partition 1) runs out of rows and the merge join stops. The per-partition count from the aggregate passes on through the Nested Loops join to another Stream Aggregate, which is maintaining a per-thread subtotal. Our same thread now picks up a new partition id from the exchange (say it gets id 9 this time). The count in the per-partition aggregate is reset to zero, and the processing of partition 9 of both tables proceeds just as it did for partition 1, and on the same thread. Each thread picks up a single partition id and processes all the data for that partition, completely independently from other threads working on other partitions. One thread might eventually process partitions (1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41) while another is concurrently processing partitions (2, 10, 18, 26, 34) and so on for the other six threads at DOP 8. The point is that all 8 threads can execute independently and concurrently, continuing to process new partitions until the wider job (of which the thread has no knowledge!) is done. This divide-and-conquer technique can be much more efficient than simply splitting the entire workload across eight threads all at once. Related Reading Understanding and Using Parallelism in SQL Server Parallel Execution Plans Suck © 2013 Paul White – All Rights Reserved Twitter: @SQL_Kiwi

    Read the article

  • Windows Azure: Backup Services Release, Hyper-V Recovery Manager, VM Enhancements, Enhanced Enterprise Management Support

    - by ScottGu
    This morning we released a huge set of updates to Windows Azure.  These new capabilities include: Backup Services: General Availability of Windows Azure Backup Services Hyper-V Recovery Manager: Public preview of Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager Virtual Machines: Delete Attached Disks, Availability Set Warnings, SQL AlwaysOn Configuration Active Directory: Securely manage hundreds of SaaS applications Enterprise Management: Use Active Directory to Better Manage Windows Azure Windows Azure SDK 2.2: A massive update of our SDK + Visual Studio tooling support All of these improvements are now available to use immediately.  Below are more details about them. Backup Service: General Availability Release of Windows Azure Backup Today we are releasing Windows Azure Backup Service as a general availability service.  This release is now live in production, backed by an enterprise SLA, supported by Microsoft Support, and is ready to use for production scenarios. Windows Azure Backup is a cloud based backup solution for Windows Server which allows files and folders to be backed up and recovered from the cloud, and provides off-site protection against data loss. The service provides IT administrators and developers with the option to back up and protect critical data in an easily recoverable way from any location with no upfront hardware cost. Windows Azure Backup is built on the Windows Azure platform and uses Windows Azure blob storage for storing customer data. Windows Server uses the downloadable Windows Azure Backup Agent to transfer file and folder data securely and efficiently to the Windows Azure Backup Service. Along with providing cloud backup for Windows Server, Windows Azure Backup Service also provides capability to backup data from System Center Data Protection Manager and Windows Server Essentials, to the cloud. All data is encrypted onsite before it is sent to the cloud, and customers retain and manage the encryption key (meaning the data is stored entirely secured and can’t be decrypted by anyone but yourself). Getting Started To get started with the Windows Azure Backup Service, create a new Backup Vault within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Click New->Data Services->Recovery Services->Backup Vault to do this: Once the backup vault is created you’ll be presented with a simple tutorial that will help guide you on how to register your Windows Servers with it: Once the servers you want to backup are registered, you can use the appropriate local management interface (such as the Microsoft Management Console snap-in, System Center Data Protection Manager Console, or Windows Server Essentials Dashboard) to configure the scheduled backups and to optionally initiate recoveries. You can follow these tutorials to learn more about how to do this: Tutorial: Schedule Backups Using the Windows Azure Backup Agent This tutorial helps you with setting up a backup schedule for your registered Windows Servers. Additionally, it also explains how to use Windows PowerShell cmdlets to set up a custom backup schedule. Tutorial: Recover Files and Folders Using the Windows Azure Backup Agent This tutorial helps you with recovering data from a backup. Additionally, it also explains how to use Windows PowerShell cmdlets to do the same tasks. Below are some of the key benefits the Windows Azure Backup Service provides: Simple configuration and management. Windows Azure Backup Service integrates with the familiar Windows Server Backup utility in Windows Server, the Data Protection Manager component in System Center and Windows Server Essentials, in order to provide a seamless backup and recovery experience to a local disk, or to the cloud. Block level incremental backups. The Windows Azure Backup Agent performs incremental backups by tracking file and block level changes and only transferring the changed blocks, hence reducing the storage and bandwidth utilization. Different point-in-time versions of the backups use storage efficiently by only storing the changes blocks between these versions. Data compression, encryption and throttling. The Windows Azure Backup Agent ensures that data is compressed and encrypted on the server before being sent to the Windows Azure Backup Service over the network. As a result, the Windows Azure Backup Service only stores encrypted data in the cloud storage. The encryption key is not available to the Windows Azure Backup Service, and as a result the data is never decrypted in the service. Also, users can setup throttling and configure how the Windows Azure Backup service utilizes the network bandwidth when backing up or restoring information. Data integrity is verified in the cloud. In addition to the secure backups, the backed up data is also automatically checked for integrity once the backup is done. As a result, any corruptions which may arise due to data transfer can be easily identified and are fixed automatically. Configurable retention policies for storing data in the cloud. The Windows Azure Backup Service accepts and implements retention policies to recycle backups that exceed the desired retention range, thereby meeting business policies and managing backup costs. Hyper-V Recovery Manager: Now Available in Public Preview I’m excited to also announce the public preview of a new Windows Azure Service – the Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager (HRM). Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager helps protect your business critical services by coordinating the replication and recovery of System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2012 SP1 and System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2012 R2 private clouds at a secondary location. With automated protection, asynchronous ongoing replication, and orderly recovery, the Hyper-V Recovery Manager service can help you implement Disaster Recovery and restore important services accurately, consistently, and with minimal downtime. Application data in an Hyper-V Recovery Manager scenarios always travels on your on-premise replication channel. Only metadata (such as names of logical clouds, virtual machines, networks etc.) that is needed for orchestration is sent to Azure. All traffic sent to/from Azure is encrypted. You can begin using Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery today by clicking New->Data Services->Recovery Services->Hyper-V Recovery Manager within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  You can read more about Windows Azure Hyper-V Recovery Manager in Brad Anderson’s 9-part series, Transform the datacenter. To learn more about setting up Hyper-V Recovery Manager follow our detailed step-by-step guide. Virtual Machines: Delete Attached Disks, Availability Set Warnings, SQL AlwaysOn Today’s Windows Azure release includes a number of nice updates to Windows Azure Virtual Machines.  These improvements include: Ability to Delete both VM Instances + Attached Disks in One Operation Prior to today’s release, when you deleted VMs within Windows Azure we would delete the VM instance – but not delete the drives attached to the VM.  You had to manually delete these yourself from the storage account.  With today’s update we’ve added a convenience option that now allows you to either retain or delete the attached disks when you delete the VM:   We’ve also added the ability to delete a cloud service, its deployments, and its role instances with a single action. This can either be a cloud service that has production and staging deployments with web and worker roles, or a cloud service that contains virtual machines.  To do this, simply select the Cloud Service within the Windows Azure Management Portal and click the “Delete” button: Warnings on Availability Sets with Only One Virtual Machine In Them One of the nice features that Windows Azure Virtual Machines supports is the concept of “Availability Sets”.  An “availability set” allows you to define a tier/role (e.g. webfrontends, databaseservers, etc) that you can map Virtual Machines into – and when you do this Windows Azure separates them across fault domains and ensures that at least one of them is always available during servicing operations.  This enables you to deploy applications in a high availability way. One issue we’ve seen some customers run into is where they define an availability set, but then forget to map more than one VM into it (which defeats the purpose of having an availability set).  With today’s release we now display a warning in the Windows Azure Management Portal if you have only one virtual machine deployed in an availability set to help highlight this: You can learn more about configuring the availability of your virtual machines here. Configuring SQL Server Always On SQL Server Always On is a great feature that you can use with Windows Azure to enable high availability and DR scenarios with SQL Server. Today’s Windows Azure release makes it even easier to configure SQL Server Always On by enabling “Direct Server Return” endpoints to be configured and managed within the Windows Azure Management Portal.  Previously, setting this up required using PowerShell to complete the endpoint configuration.  Starting today you can enable this simply by checking the “Direct Server Return” checkbox: You can learn more about how to use direct server return for SQL Server AlwaysOn availability groups here. Active Directory: Application Access Enhancements This summer we released our initial preview of our Application Access Enhancements for Windows Azure Active Directory.  This service enables you to securely implement single-sign-on (SSO) support against SaaS applications (including Office 365, SalesForce, Workday, Box, Google Apps, GitHub, etc) as well as LOB based applications (including ones built with the new Windows Azure AD support we shipped last week with ASP.NET and VS 2013). Since the initial preview we’ve enhanced our SAML federation capabilities, integrated our new password vaulting system, and shipped multi-factor authentication support. We've also turned on our outbound identity provisioning system and have it working with hundreds of additional SaaS Applications: Earlier this month we published an update on dates and pricing for when the service will be released in general availability form.  In this blog post we announced our intention to release the service in general availability form by the end of the year.  We also announced that the below features would be available in a free tier with it: SSO to every SaaS app we integrate with – Users can Single Sign On to any app we are integrated with at no charge. This includes all the top SAAS Apps and every app in our application gallery whether they use federation or password vaulting. Application access assignment and removal – IT Admins can assign access privileges to web applications to the users in their active directory assuring that every employee has access to the SAAS Apps they need. And when a user leaves the company or changes jobs, the admin can just as easily remove their access privileges assuring data security and minimizing IP loss User provisioning (and de-provisioning) – IT admins will be able to automatically provision users in 3rd party SaaS applications like Box, Salesforce.com, GoToMeeting, DropBox and others. We are working with key partners in the ecosystem to establish these connections, meaning you no longer have to continually update user records in multiple systems. Security and auditing reports – Security is a key priority for us. With the free version of these enhancements you'll get access to our standard set of access reports giving you visibility into which users are using which applications, when they were using them and where they are using them from. In addition, we'll alert you to un-usual usage patterns for instance when a user logs in from multiple locations at the same time. Our Application Access Panel – Users are logging in from every type of devices including Windows, iOS, & Android. Not all of these devices handle authentication in the same manner but the user doesn't care. They need to access their apps from the devices they love. Our Application Access Panel will support the ability for users to access access and launch their apps from any device and anywhere. You can learn more about our plans for application management with Windows Azure Active Directory here.  Try out the preview and start using it today. Enterprise Management: Use Active Directory to Better Manage Windows Azure Windows Azure Active Directory provides the ability to manage your organization in a directory which is hosted entirely in the cloud, or alternatively kept in sync with an on-premises Windows Server Active Directory solution (allowing you to seamlessly integrate with the directory you already have).  With today’s Windows Azure release we are integrating Windows Azure Active Directory even more within the core Windows Azure management experience, and enabling an even richer enterprise security offering.  Specifically: 1) All Windows Azure accounts now have a default Windows Azure Active Directory created for them.  You can create and map any users you want into this directory, and grant administrative rights to manage resources in Windows Azure to these users. 2) You can keep this directory entirely hosted in the cloud – or optionally sync it with your on-premises Windows Server Active Directory.  Both options are free.  The later approach is ideal for companies that wish to use their corporate user identities to sign-in and manage Windows Azure resources.  It also ensures that if an employee leaves an organization, his or her access control rights to the company’s Windows Azure resources are immediately revoked. 3) The Windows Azure Service Management APIs have been updated to support using Windows Azure Active Directory credentials to sign-in and perform management operations.  Prior to today’s release customers had to download and use management certificates (which were not scoped to individual users) to perform management operations.  We still support this management certificate approach (don’t worry – nothing will stop working).  But we think the new Windows Azure Active Directory authentication support enables an even easier and more secure way for customers to manage resources going forward.  4) The Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release (which is also shipping today) includes built-in support for the new Service Management APIs that authenticate with Windows Azure Active Directory, and now allow you to create and manage Windows Azure applications and resources directly within Visual Studio using your Active Directory credentials.  This, combined with updated PowerShell scripts that also support Active Directory, enables an end-to-end enterprise authentication story with Windows Azure. Below are some details on how all of this works: Subscriptions within a Directory As part of today’s update, we have associated all existing Window Azure accounts with a Windows Azure Active Directory (and created one for you if you don’t already have one). When you login to the Windows Azure Management Portal you’ll now see the directory name in the URI of the browser.  For example, in the screen-shot below you can see that I have a “scottgu” directory that my subscriptions are hosted within: Note that you can continue to use Microsoft Accounts (formerly known as Microsoft Live IDs) to sign-into Windows Azure.  These map just fine to a Windows Azure Active Directory – so there is no need to create new usernames that are specific to a directory if you don’t want to.  In the scenario above I’m actually logged in using my @hotmail.com based Microsoft ID which is now mapped to a “scottgu” active directory that was created for me.  By default everything will continue to work just like you used to before. Manage your Directory You can manage an Active Directory (including the one we now create for you by default) by clicking the “Active Directory” tab in the left-hand side of the portal.  This will list all of the directories in your account.  Clicking one the first time will display a getting started page that provides documentation and links to perform common tasks with it: You can use the built-in directory management support within the Windows Azure Management Portal to add/remove/manage users within the directory, enable multi-factor authentication, associate a custom domain (e.g. mycompanyname.com) with the directory, and/or rename the directory to whatever friendly name you want (just click the configure tab to do this).  You can also setup the directory to automatically sync with an on-premises Active Directory using the “Directory Integration” tab. Note that users within a directory by default do not have admin rights to login or manage Windows Azure based resources.  You still need to explicitly grant them co-admin permissions on a subscription for them to login or manage resources in Windows Azure.  You can do this by clicking the Settings tab on the left-hand side of the portal and then by clicking the administrators tab within it. Sign-In Integration within Visual Studio If you install the new Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release, you can now connect to Windows Azure from directly inside Visual Studio without having to download any management certificates.  You can now just right-click on the “Windows Azure” icon within the Server Explorer and choose the “Connect to Windows Azure” context menu option to do so: Doing this will prompt you to enter the email address of the username you wish to sign-in with (make sure this account is a user in your directory with co-admin rights on a subscription): You can use either a Microsoft Account (e.g. Windows Live ID) or an Active Directory based Organizational account as the email.  The dialog will update with an appropriate login prompt depending on which type of email address you enter: Once you sign-in you’ll see the Windows Azure resources that you have permissions to manage show up automatically within the Visual Studio server explorer and be available to start using: No downloading of management certificates required.  All of the authentication was handled using your Windows Azure Active Directory! Manage Subscriptions across Multiple Directories If you have already have multiple directories and multiple subscriptions within your Windows Azure account, we have done our best to create a good default mapping of your subscriptions->directories as part of today’s update.  If you don’t like the default subscription-to-directory mapping we have done you can click the Settings tab in the left-hand navigation of the Windows Azure Management Portal and browse to the Subscriptions tab within it: If you want to map a subscription under a different directory in your account, simply select the subscription from the list, and then click the “Edit Directory” button to choose which directory to map it to.  Mapping a subscription to a different directory takes only seconds and will not cause any of the resources within the subscription to recycle or stop working.  We’ve made the directory->subscription mapping process self-service so that you always have complete control and can map things however you want. Filtering By Directory and Subscription Within the Windows Azure Management Portal you can filter resources in the portal by subscription (allowing you to show/hide different subscriptions).  If you have subscriptions mapped to multiple directory tenants, we also now have a filter drop-down that allows you to filter the subscription list by directory tenant.  This filter is only available if you have multiple subscriptions mapped to multiple directories within your Windows Azure Account:   Windows Azure SDK 2.2 Today we are also releasing a major update of our Windows Azure SDK.  The Windows Azure SDK 2.2 release adds some great new features including: Visual Studio 2013 Support Integrated Windows Azure Sign-In support within Visual Studio Remote Debugging Cloud Services with Visual Studio Firewall Management support within Visual Studio for SQL Databases Visual Studio 2013 RTM VM Images for MSDN Subscribers Windows Azure Management Libraries for .NET Updated Windows Azure PowerShell Cmdlets and ScriptCenter I’ll post a follow-up blog shortly with more details about all of the above. Additional Updates In addition to the above enhancements, today’s release also includes a number of additional improvements: AutoScale: Richer time and date based scheduling support (set different rules on different dates) AutoScale: Ability to Scale to Zero Virtual Machines (very useful for Dev/Test scenarios) AutoScale: Support for time-based scheduling of Mobile Service AutoScale rules Operation Logs: Auditing support for Service Bus management operations Today we also shipped a major update to the Windows Azure SDK – Windows Azure SDK 2.2.  It has so much goodness in it that I have a whole second blog post coming shortly on it! :-) Summary Today’s Windows Azure release enables a bunch of great new scenarios, and enables a much richer enterprise authentication offering. If you don’t already have a Windows Azure account, you can sign-up for a free trial and start using all of the above features today.  Then visit the Windows Azure Developer Center to learn more about how to build apps with it. Hope this helps, Scott P.S. In addition to blogging, I am also now using Twitter for quick updates and to share links. Follow me at: twitter.com/scottgu

    Read the article

  • Scrum in 5 Minutes

    - by Stephen.Walther
    The goal of this blog entry is to explain the basic concepts of Scrum in less than five minutes. You learn how Scrum can help a team of developers to successfully complete a complex software project. Product Backlog and the Product Owner Imagine that you are part of a team which needs to create a new website – for example, an e-commerce website. You have an overwhelming amount of work to do. You need to build (or possibly buy) a shopping cart, install an SSL certificate, create a product catalog, create a Facebook page, and at least a hundred other things that you have not thought of yet. According to Scrum, the first thing you should do is create a list. Place the highest priority items at the top of the list and the lower priority items lower in the list. For example, creating the shopping cart and buying the domain name might be high priority items and creating a Facebook page might be a lower priority item. In Scrum, this list is called the Product Backlog. How do you prioritize the items in the Product Backlog? Different stakeholders in the project might have different priorities. Gary, your division VP, thinks that it is crucial that the e-commerce site has a mobile app. Sally, your direct manager, thinks taking advantage of new HTML5 features is much more important. Multiple people are pulling you in different directions. According to Scrum, it is important that you always designate one person, and only one person, as the Product Owner. The Product Owner is the person who decides what items should be added to the Product Backlog and the priority of the items in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner could be the customer who is paying the bills, the project manager who is responsible for delivering the project, or a customer representative. The critical point is that the Product Owner must always be a single person and that single person has absolute authority over the Product Backlog. Sprints and the Sprint Backlog So now the developer team has a prioritized list of items and they can start work. The team starts implementing the first item in the Backlog — the shopping cart — and the team is making good progress. Unfortunately, however, half-way through the work of implementing the shopping cart, the Product Owner changes his mind. The Product Owner decides that it is much more important to create the product catalog before the shopping cart. With some frustration, the team switches their developmental efforts to focus on implementing the product catalog. However, part way through completing this work, once again the Product Owner changes his mind about the highest priority item. Getting work done when priorities are constantly shifting is frustrating for the developer team and it results in lower productivity. At the same time, however, the Product Owner needs to have absolute authority over the priority of the items which need to get done. Scrum solves this conflict with the concept of Sprints. In Scrum, a developer team works in Sprints. At the beginning of a Sprint the developers and the Product Owner agree on the items from the backlog which they will complete during the Sprint. This subset of items from the Product Backlog becomes the Sprint Backlog. During the Sprint, the Product Owner is not allowed to change the items in the Sprint Backlog. In other words, the Product Owner cannot shift priorities on the developer team during the Sprint. Different teams use Sprints of different lengths such as one month Sprints, two-week Sprints, and one week Sprints. For high-stress, time critical projects, teams typically choose shorter sprints such as one week sprints. For more mature projects, longer one month sprints might be more appropriate. A team can pick whatever Sprint length makes sense for them just as long as the team is consistent. You should pick a Sprint length and stick with it. Daily Scrum During a Sprint, the developer team needs to have meetings to coordinate their work on completing the items in the Sprint Backlog. For example, the team needs to discuss who is working on what and whether any blocking issues have been discovered. Developers hate meetings (well, sane developers hate meetings). Meetings take developers away from their work of actually implementing stuff as opposed to talking about implementing stuff. However, a developer team which never has meetings and never coordinates their work also has problems. For example, Fred might get stuck on a programming problem for days and never reach out for help even though Tom (who sits in the cubicle next to him) has already solved the very same problem. Or, both Ted and Fred might have started working on the same item from the Sprint Backlog at the same time. In Scrum, these conflicting needs – limiting meetings but enabling team coordination – are resolved with the idea of the Daily Scrum. The Daily Scrum is a meeting for coordinating the work of the developer team which happens once a day. To keep the meeting short, each developer answers only the following three questions: 1. What have you done since yesterday? 2. What do you plan to do today? 3. Any impediments in your way? During the Daily Scrum, developers are not allowed to talk about issues with their cat, do demos of their latest work, or tell heroic stories of programming problems overcome. The meeting must be kept short — typically about 15 minutes. Issues which come up during the Daily Scrum should be discussed in separate meetings which do not involve the whole developer team. Stories and Tasks Items in the Product or Sprint Backlog – such as building a shopping cart or creating a Facebook page – are often referred to as User Stories or Stories. The Stories are created by the Product Owner and should represent some business need. Unlike the Product Owner, the developer team needs to think about how a Story should be implemented. At the beginning of a Sprint, the developer team takes the Stories from the Sprint Backlog and breaks the stories into tasks. For example, the developer team might take the Create a Shopping Cart story and break it into the following tasks: · Enable users to add and remote items from shopping cart · Persist the shopping cart to database between visits · Redirect user to checkout page when Checkout button is clicked During the Daily Scrum, members of the developer team volunteer to complete the tasks required to implement the next Story in the Sprint Backlog. When a developer talks about what he did yesterday or plans to do tomorrow then the developer should be referring to a task. Stories are owned by the Product Owner and a story is all about business value. In contrast, the tasks are owned by the developer team and a task is all about implementation details. A story might take several days or weeks to complete. A task is something which a developer can complete in less than a day. Some teams get lazy about breaking stories into tasks. Neglecting to break stories into tasks can lead to “Never Ending Stories” If you don’t break a story into tasks, then you can’t know how much of a story has actually been completed because you don’t have a clear idea about the implementation steps required to complete the story. Scrumboard During the Daily Scrum, the developer team uses a Scrumboard to coordinate their work. A Scrumboard contains a list of the stories for the current Sprint, the tasks associated with each Story, and the state of each task. The developer team uses the Scrumboard so everyone on the team can see, at a glance, what everyone is working on. As a developer works on a task, the task moves from state to state and the state of the task is updated on the Scrumboard. Common task states are ToDo, In Progress, and Done. Some teams include additional task states such as Needs Review or Needs Testing. Some teams use a physical Scrumboard. In that case, you use index cards to represent the stories and the tasks and you tack the index cards onto a physical board. Using a physical Scrumboard has several disadvantages. A physical Scrumboard does not work well with a distributed team – for example, it is hard to share the same physical Scrumboard between Boston and Seattle. Also, generating reports from a physical Scrumboard is more difficult than generating reports from an online Scrumboard. Estimating Stories and Tasks Stakeholders in a project, the people investing in a project, need to have an idea of how a project is progressing and when the project will be completed. For example, if you are investing in creating an e-commerce site, you need to know when the site can be launched. It is not enough to just say that “the project will be done when it is done” because the stakeholders almost certainly have a limited budget to devote to the project. The people investing in the project cannot determine the business value of the project unless they can have an estimate of how long it will take to complete the project. Developers hate to give estimates. The reason that developers hate to give estimates is that the estimates are almost always completely made up. For example, you really don’t know how long it takes to build a shopping cart until you finish building a shopping cart, and at that point, the estimate is no longer useful. The problem is that writing code is much more like Finding a Cure for Cancer than Building a Brick Wall. Building a brick wall is very straightforward. After you learn how to add one brick to a wall, you understand everything that is involved in adding a brick to a wall. There is no additional research required and no surprises. If, on the other hand, I assembled a team of scientists and asked them to find a cure for cancer, and estimate exactly how long it will take, they would have no idea. The problem is that there are too many unknowns. I don’t know how to cure cancer, I need to do a lot of research here, so I cannot even begin to estimate how long it will take. So developers hate to provide estimates, but the Product Owner and other product stakeholders, have a legitimate need for estimates. Scrum resolves this conflict by using the idea of Story Points. Different teams use different units to represent Story Points. For example, some teams use shirt sizes such as Small, Medium, Large, and X-Large. Some teams prefer to use Coffee Cup sizes such as Tall, Short, and Grande. Finally, some teams like to use numbers from the Fibonacci series. These alternative units are converted into a Story Point value. Regardless of the type of unit which you use to represent Story Points, the goal is the same. Instead of attempting to estimate a Story in hours (which is doomed to failure), you use a much less fine-grained measure of work. A developer team is much more likely to be able to estimate that a Story is Small or X-Large than the exact number of hours required to complete the story. So you can think of Story Points as a compromise between the needs of the Product Owner and the developer team. When a Sprint starts, the developer team devotes more time to thinking about the Stories in a Sprint and the developer team breaks the Stories into Tasks. In Scrum, you estimate the work required to complete a Story by using Story Points and you estimate the work required to complete a task by using hours. The difference between Stories and Tasks is that you don’t create a task until you are just about ready to start working on a task. A task is something that you should be able to create within a day, so you have a much better chance of providing an accurate estimate of the work required to complete a task than a story. Burndown Charts In Scrum, you use Burndown charts to represent the remaining work on a project. You use Release Burndown charts to represent the overall remaining work for a project and you use Sprint Burndown charts to represent the overall remaining work for a particular Sprint. You create a Release Burndown chart by calculating the remaining number of uncompleted Story Points for the entire Product Backlog every day. The vertical axis represents Story Points and the horizontal axis represents time. A Sprint Burndown chart is similar to a Release Burndown chart, but it focuses on the remaining work for a particular Sprint. There are two different types of Sprint Burndown charts. You can either represent the remaining work in a Sprint with Story Points or with task hours (the following image, taken from Wikipedia, uses hours). When each Product Backlog Story is completed, the Release Burndown chart slopes down. When each Story or task is completed, the Sprint Burndown chart slopes down. Burndown charts typically do not always slope down over time. As new work is added to the Product Backlog, the Release Burndown chart slopes up. If new tasks are discovered during a Sprint, the Sprint Burndown chart will also slope up. The purpose of a Burndown chart is to give you a way to track team progress over time. If, halfway through a Sprint, the Sprint Burndown chart is still climbing a hill then you know that you are in trouble. Team Velocity Stakeholders in a project always want more work done faster. For example, the Product Owner for the e-commerce site wants the website to launch before tomorrow. Developers tend to be overly optimistic. Rarely do developers acknowledge the physical limitations of reality. So Project stakeholders and the developer team often collude to delude themselves about how much work can be done and how quickly. Too many software projects begin in a state of optimism and end in frustration as deadlines zoom by. In Scrum, this problem is overcome by calculating a number called the Team Velocity. The Team Velocity is a measure of the average number of Story Points which a team has completed in previous Sprints. Knowing the Team Velocity is important during the Sprint Planning meeting when the Product Owner and the developer team work together to determine the number of stories which can be completed in the next Sprint. If you know the Team Velocity then you can avoid committing to do more work than the team has been able to accomplish in the past, and your team is much more likely to complete all of the work required for the next Sprint. Scrum Master There are three roles in Scrum: the Product Owner, the developer team, and the Scrum Master. I’v e already discussed the Product Owner. The Product Owner is the one and only person who maintains the Product Backlog and prioritizes the stories. I’ve also described the role of the developer team. The members of the developer team do the work of implementing the stories by breaking the stories into tasks. The final role, which I have not discussed, is the role of the Scrum Master. The Scrum Master is responsible for ensuring that the team is following the Scrum process. For example, the Scrum Master is responsible for making sure that there is a Daily Scrum meeting and that everyone answers the standard three questions. The Scrum Master is also responsible for removing (non-technical) impediments which the team might encounter. For example, if the team cannot start work until everyone installs the latest version of Microsoft Visual Studio then the Scrum Master has the responsibility of working with management to get the latest version of Visual Studio as quickly as possible. The Scrum Master can be a member of the developer team. Furthermore, different people can take on the role of the Scrum Master over time. The Scrum Master, however, cannot be the same person as the Product Owner. Using SonicAgile SonicAgile (SonicAgile.com) is an online tool which you can use to manage your projects using Scrum. You can use the SonicAgile Product Backlog to create a prioritized list of stories. You can estimate the size of the Stories using different Story Point units such as Shirt Sizes and Coffee Cup sizes. You can use SonicAgile during the Sprint Planning meeting to select the Stories that you want to complete during a particular Sprint. You can configure Sprints to be any length of time. SonicAgile calculates Team Velocity automatically and displays a warning when you add too many stories to a Sprint. In other words, it warns you when it thinks you are overcommitting in a Sprint. SonicAgile also includes a Scrumboard which displays the list of Stories selected for a Sprint and the tasks associated with each story. You can drag tasks from one task state to another. Finally, SonicAgile enables you to generate Release Burndown and Sprint Burndown charts. You can use these charts to view the progress of your team. To learn more about SonicAgile, visit SonicAgile.com. Summary In this post, I described many of the basic concepts of Scrum. You learned how a Product Owner uses a Product Backlog to create a prioritized list of tasks. I explained why work is completed in Sprints so the developer team can be more productive. I also explained how a developer team uses the daily scrum to coordinate their work. You learned how the developer team uses a Scrumboard to see, at a glance, who is working on what and the state of each task. I also discussed Burndown charts. You learned how you can use both Release and Sprint Burndown charts to track team progress in completing a project. Finally, I described the crucial role of the Scrum Master – the person who is responsible for ensuring that the rules of Scrum are being followed. My goal was not to describe all of the concepts of Scrum. This post was intended to be an introductory overview. For a comprehensive explanation of Scrum, I recommend reading Ken Schwaber’s book Agile Project Management with Scrum: http://www.amazon.com/Agile-Project-Management-Microsoft-Professional/dp/073561993X/ref=la_B001H6ODMC_1_1?ie=UTF8&qid=1345224000&sr=1-1

    Read the article

  • Quick guide to Oracle IRM 11g: Classification design

    - by Simon Thorpe
    Quick guide to Oracle IRM 11g indexThis is the final article in the quick guide to Oracle IRM. If you've followed everything prior you will now have a fully functional and tested Information Rights Management service. It doesn't matter if you've been following the 10g or 11g guide as this next article is common to both. ContentsWhy this is the most important part... Understanding the classification and standard rights model Identifying business use cases Creating an effective IRM classification modelOne single classification across the entire businessA context for each and every possible granular use caseWhat makes a good context? Deciding on the use of roles in the context Reviewing the features and security for context roles Summary Why this is the most important part...Now the real work begins, installing and getting an IRM system running is as simple as following instructions. However to actually have an IRM technology easily protecting your most sensitive information without interfering with your users existing daily work flows and be able to scale IRM across the entire business, requires thought into how confidential documents are created, used and distributed. This article is going to give you the information you need to ask the business the right questions so that you can deploy your IRM service successfully. The IRM team here at Oracle have over 10 years of experience in helping customers and it is important you understand the following to be successful in securing access to your most confidential information. Whatever you are trying to secure, be it mergers and acquisitions information, engineering intellectual property, health care documentation or financial reports. No matter what type of user is going to access the information, be they employees, contractors or customers, there are common goals you are always trying to achieve.Securing the content at the earliest point possible and do it automatically. Removing the dependency on the user to decide to secure the content reduces the risk of mistakes significantly and therefore results a more secure deployment. K.I.S.S. (Keep It Simple Stupid) Reduce complexity in the rights/classification model. Oracle IRM lets you make changes to access to documents even after they are secured which allows you to start with a simple model and then introduce complexity once you've understood how the technology is going to be used in the business. After an initial learning period you can review your implementation and start to make informed decisions based on user feedback and administration experience. Clearly communicate to the user, when appropriate, any changes to their existing work practice. You must make every effort to make the transition to sealed content as simple as possible. For external users you must help them understand why you are securing the documents and inform them the value of the technology to both your business and them. Before getting into the detail, I must pay homage to Martin White, Vice President of client services in SealedMedia, the company Oracle acquired and who created Oracle IRM. In the SealedMedia years Martin was involved with every single customer and was key to the design of certain aspects of the IRM technology, specifically the context model we will be discussing here. Listening carefully to customers and understanding the flexibility of the IRM technology, Martin taught me all the skills of helping customers build scalable, effective and simple to use IRM deployments. No matter how well the engineering department designed the software, badly designed and poorly executed projects can result in difficult to use and manage, and ultimately insecure solutions. The advice and information that follows was born with Martin and he's still delivering IRM consulting with customers and can be found at www.thinkers.co.uk. It is from Martin and others that Oracle not only has the most advanced, scalable and usable document security solution on the market, but Oracle and their partners have the most experience in delivering successful document security solutions. Understanding the classification and standard rights model The goal of any successful IRM deployment is to balance the increase in security the technology brings without over complicating the way people use secured content and avoid a significant increase in administration and maintenance. With Oracle it is possible to automate the protection of content, deploy the desktop software transparently and use authentication methods such that users can open newly secured content initially unaware the document is any different to an insecure one. That is until of course they attempt to do something for which they don't have any rights, such as copy and paste to an insecure application or try and print. Central to achieving this objective is creating a classification model that is simple to understand and use but also provides the right level of complexity to meet the business needs. In Oracle IRM the term used for each classification is a "context". A context defines the relationship between.A group of related documents The people that use the documents The roles that these people perform The rights that these people need to perform their role The context is the key to the success of Oracle IRM. It provides the separation of the role and rights of a user from the content itself. Documents are sealed to contexts but none of the rights, user or group information is stored within the content itself. Sealing only places information about the location of the IRM server that sealed it, the context applied to the document and a few other pieces of metadata that pertain only to the document. This important separation of rights from content means that millions of documents can be secured against a single classification and a user needs only one right assigned to be able to access all documents. If you have followed all the previous articles in this guide, you will be ready to start defining contexts to which your sensitive information will be protected. But before you even start with IRM, you need to understand how your own business uses and creates sensitive documents and emails. Identifying business use cases Oracle is able to support multiple classification systems, but usually there is one single initial need for the technology which drives a deployment. This need might be to protect sensitive mergers and acquisitions information, engineering intellectual property, financial documents. For this and every subsequent use case you must understand how users create and work with documents, to who they are distributed and how the recipients should interact with them. A successful IRM deployment should start with one well identified use case (we go through some examples towards the end of this article) and then after letting this use case play out in the business, you learn how your users work with content, how well your communication to the business worked and if the classification system you deployed delivered the right balance. It is at this point you can start rolling the technology out further. Creating an effective IRM classification model Once you have selected the initial use case you will address with IRM, you need to design a classification model that defines the access to secured documents within the use case. In Oracle IRM there is an inbuilt classification system called the "context" model. In Oracle IRM 11g it is possible to extend the server to support any rights classification model, but the majority of users who are not using an application integration (such as Oracle IRM within Oracle Beehive) are likely to be starting out with the built in context model. Before looking at creating a classification system with IRM, it is worth reviewing some recognized standards and methods for creating and implementing security policy. A very useful set of documents are the ISO 17799 guidelines and the SANS security policy templates. First task is to create a context against which documents are to be secured. A context consists of a group of related documents (all top secret engineering research), a list of roles (contributors and readers) which define how users can access documents and a list of users (research engineers) who have been given a role allowing them to interact with sealed content. Before even creating the first context it is wise to decide on a philosophy which will dictate the level of granularity, the question is, where do you start? At a department level? By project? By technology? First consider the two ends of the spectrum... One single classification across the entire business Imagine that instead of having separate contexts, one for engineering intellectual property, one for your financial data, one for human resources personally identifiable information, you create one context for all documents across the entire business. Whilst you may have immediate objections, there are some significant benefits in thinking about considering this. Document security classification decisions are simple. You only have one context to chose from! User provisioning is simple, just make sure everyone has a role in the only context in the business. Administration is very low, if you assign rights to groups from the business user repository you probably never have to touch IRM administration again. There are however some obvious downsides to this model.All users in have access to all IRM secured content. So potentially a sales person could access sensitive mergers and acquisition documents, if they can get their hands on a copy that is. You cannot delegate control of different documents to different parts of the business, this may not satisfy your regulatory requirements for the separation and delegation of duties. Changing a users role affects every single document ever secured. Even though it is very unlikely a business would ever use one single context to secure all their sensitive information, thinking about this scenario raises one very important point. Just having one single context and securing all confidential documents to it, whilst incurring some of the problems detailed above, has one huge value. Once secured, IRM protected content can ONLY be accessed by authorized users. Just think of all the sensitive documents in your business today, imagine if you could ensure that only everyone you trust could open them. Even if an employee lost a laptop or someone accidentally sent an email to the wrong recipient, only the right people could open that file. A context for each and every possible granular use case Now let's think about the total opposite of a single context design. What if you created a context for each and every single defined business need and created multiple contexts within this for each level of granularity? Let's take a use case where we need to protect engineering intellectual property. Imagine we have 6 different engineering groups, and in each we have a research department, a design department and manufacturing. The company information security policy defines 3 levels of information sensitivity... restricted, confidential and top secret. Then let's say that each group and department needs to define access to information from both internal and external users. Finally add into the mix that they want to review the rights model for each context every financial quarter. This would result in a huge amount of contexts. For example, lets just look at the resulting contexts for one engineering group. Q1FY2010 Restricted Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Restricted Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Restricted Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Q1FY2010 Restricted External- Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Restricted External - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Restricted External - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Q1FY2010 Confidential Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Confidential Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Confidential Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Q1FY2010 Confidential External - Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Confidential External - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Confidential External - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Q1FY2010 Top Secret Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Top Secret Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Top Secret Internal - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Q1FY2010 Top Secret External - Engineering Group 1 - Research Q1FY2010 Top Secret External - Engineering Group 1 - Design Q1FY2010 Top Secret External - Engineering Group 1 - Manufacturing Now multiply the above by 6 for each engineering group, 18 contexts. You are then creating/reviewing another 18 every 3 months. After a year you've got 72 contexts. What would be the advantages of such a complex classification model? You can satisfy very granular rights requirements, for example only an authorized engineering group 1 researcher can create a top secret report for access internally, and his role will be reviewed on a very frequent basis. Your business may have very complex rights requirements and mapping this directly to IRM may be an obvious exercise. The disadvantages of such a classification model are significant...Huge administrative overhead. Someone in the business must manage, review and administrate each of these contexts. If the engineering group had a single administrator, they would have 72 classifications to reside over each year. From an end users perspective life will be very confusing. Imagine if a user has rights in just 6 of these contexts. They may be able to print content from one but not another, be able to edit content in 2 contexts but not the other 4. Such confusion at the end user level causes frustration and resistance to the use of the technology. Increased synchronization complexity. Imagine a user who after 3 years in the company ends up with over 300 rights in many different contexts across the business. This would result in long synchronization times as the client software updates all your offline rights. Hard to understand who can do what with what. Imagine being the VP of engineering and as part of an internal security audit you are asked the question, "What rights to researchers have to our top secret information?". In this complex model the answer is not simple, it would depend on many roles in many contexts. Of course this example is extreme, but it highlights that trying to build many barriers in your business can result in a nightmare of administration and confusion amongst users. In the real world what we need is a balance of the two. We need to seek an optimum number of contexts. Too many contexts are unmanageable and too few contexts does not give fine enough granularity. What makes a good context? Good context design derives mainly from how well you understand your business requirements to secure access to confidential information. Some customers I have worked with can tell me exactly the documents they wish to secure and know exactly who should be opening them. However there are some customers who know only of the government regulation that requires them to control access to certain types of information, they don't actually know where the documents are, how they are created or understand exactly who should have access. Therefore you need to know how to ask the business the right questions that lead to information which help you define a context. First ask these questions about a set of documentsWhat is the topic? Who are legitimate contributors on this topic? Who are the authorized readership? If the answer to any one of these is significantly different, then it probably merits a separate context. Remember that sealed documents are inherently secure and as such they cannot leak to your competitors, therefore it is better sealed to a broad context than not sealed at all. Simplicity is key here. Always revert to the first extreme example of a single classification, then work towards essential complexity. If there is any doubt, always prefer fewer contexts. Remember, Oracle IRM allows you to change your mind later on. You can implement a design now and continue to change and refine as you learn how the technology is used. It is easy to go from a simple model to a more complex one, it is much harder to take a complex model that is already embedded in the work practice of users and try to simplify it. It is also wise to take a single use case and address this first with the business. Don't try and tackle many different problems from the outset. Do one, learn from the process, refine it and then take what you have learned into the next use case, refine and continue. Once you have a good grasp of the technology and understand how your business will use it, you can then start rolling out the technology wider across the business. Deciding on the use of roles in the context Once you have decided on that first initial use case and a context to create let's look at the details you need to decide upon. For each context, identify; Administrative rolesBusiness owner, the person who makes decisions about who may or may not see content in this context. This is often the person who wanted to use IRM and drove the business purchase. They are the usually the person with the most at risk when sensitive information is lost. Point of contact, the person who will handle requests for access to content. Sometimes the same as the business owner, sometimes a trusted secretary or administrator. Context administrator, the person who will enact the decisions of the Business Owner. Sometimes the point of contact, sometimes a trusted IT person. Document related rolesContributors, the people who create and edit documents in this context. Reviewers, the people who are involved in reviewing documents but are not trusted to secure information to this classification. This role is not always necessary. (See later discussion on Published-work and Work-in-Progress) Readers, the people who read documents from this context. Some people may have several of the roles above, which is fine. What you are trying to do is understand and define how the business interacts with your sensitive information. These roles obviously map directly to roles available in Oracle IRM. Reviewing the features and security for context roles At this point we have decided on a classification of information, understand what roles people in the business will play when administrating this classification and how they will interact with content. The final piece of the puzzle in getting the information for our first context is to look at the permissions people will have to sealed documents. First think why are you protecting the documents in the first place? It is to prevent the loss of leaking of information to the wrong people. To control the information, making sure that people only access the latest versions of documents. You are not using Oracle IRM to prevent unauthorized people from doing legitimate work. This is an important point, with IRM you can erect many barriers to prevent access to content yet too many restrictions and authorized users will often find ways to circumvent using the technology and end up distributing unprotected originals. Because IRM is a security technology, it is easy to get carried away restricting different groups. However I would highly recommend starting with a simple solution with few restrictions. Ensure that everyone who reasonably needs to read documents can do so from the outset. Remember that with Oracle IRM you can change rights to content whenever you wish and tighten security. Always return to the fact that the greatest value IRM brings is that ONLY authorized users can access secured content, remember that simple "one context for the entire business" model. At the start of the deployment you really need to aim for user acceptance and therefore a simple model is more likely to succeed. As time passes and users understand how IRM works you can start to introduce more restrictions and complexity. Another key aspect to focus on is handling exceptions. If you decide on a context model where engineering can only access engineering information, and sales can only access sales data. Act quickly when a sales manager needs legitimate access to a set of engineering documents. Having a quick and effective process for permitting other people with legitimate needs to obtain appropriate access will be rewarded with acceptance from the user community. These use cases can often be satisfied by integrating IRM with a good Identity & Access Management technology which simplifies the process of assigning users the correct business roles. The big print issue... Printing is often an issue of contention, users love to print but the business wants to ensure sensitive information remains in the controlled digital world. There are many cases of physical document loss causing a business pain, it is often overlooked that IRM can help with this issue by limiting the ability to generate physical copies of digital content. However it can be hard to maintain a balance between security and usability when it comes to printing. Consider the following points when deciding about whether to give print rights. Oracle IRM sealed documents can contain watermarks that expose information about the user, time and location of access and the classification of the document. This information would reside in the printed copy making it easier to trace who printed it. Printed documents are slower to distribute in comparison to their digital counterparts, so time sensitive information in printed format may present a lower risk. Print activity is audited, therefore you can monitor and react to users abusing print rights. Summary In summary it is important to think carefully about the way you create your context model. As you ask the business these questions you may get a variety of different requirements. There may be special projects that require a context just for sensitive information created during the lifetime of the project. There may be a department that requires all information in the group is secured and you might have a few senior executives who wish to use IRM to exchange a small number of highly sensitive documents with a very small number of people. Oracle IRM, with its very flexible context classification system, can support all of these use cases. The trick is to introducing the complexity to deliver them at the right level. In another article i'm working on I will go through some examples of how Oracle IRM might map to existing business use cases. But for now, this article covers all the important questions you need to get your IRM service deployed and successfully protecting your most sensitive information.

    Read the article

  • Setting up a local AI server - easy with Solaris 11

    - by Stefan Hinker
    Many things are new in Solaris 11, Autoinstall is one of them.  If, like me, you've known Jumpstart for the last 2 centuries or so, you'll have to start from scratch.  Well, almost, as the concepts are similar, and it's not all that difficult.  Just new. I wanted to have an AI server that I could use for demo purposes, on the train if need be.  That answers the question of hardware requirements: portable.  But let's start at the beginning. First, you need an OS image, of course.  In the new world of Solaris 11, it is now called a repository.  The original can be downloaded from the Solaris 11 page at Oracle.   What you want is the "Oracle Solaris 11 11/11 Repository Image", which comes in two parts that can be combined using cat.  MD5 checksums for these (and all other downloads from that page) are available closer to the top of the page. With that, building the repository is quick and simple: # zfs create -o mountpoint=/export/repo rpool/ai/repo # zfs create rpool/ai/repo/s11 # mount -o ro -F hsfs /tmp/sol-11-1111-repo-full.iso /mnt # rsync -aP /mnt/repo /export/repo/s11 # umount /mnt # pkgrepo rebuild -s /export/repo/sol11/repo # zfs snapshot rpool/ai/repo/sol11@fcs # pkgrepo info -s /export/repo/sol11/repo PUBLISHER PACKAGES STATUS UPDATED solaris 4292 online 2012-03-12T20:47:15.378639Z That's all there's to it.  Let's make a snapshot, just to be on the safe side.  You never know when one will come in handy.  To use this repository, you could just add it as a file-based publisher: # pkg set-publisher -g file:///export/repo/sol11/repo solaris In case I'd want to access this repository through a (virtual) network, i'll now quickly activate the repository-service: # svccfg -s application/pkg/server \ setprop pkg/inst_root=/export/repo/sol11/repo # svccfg -s application/pkg/server setprop pkg/readonly=true # svcadm refresh application/pkg/server # svcadm enable application/pkg/server That's all you need - now point your browser to http://localhost/ to view your beautiful repository-server. Step 1 is done.  All of this, by the way, is nicely documented in the README file that's contained in the repository image. Of course, we already have updates to the original release.  You can find them in MOS in the Oracle Solaris 11 Support Repository Updates (SRU) Index.  You can simply add these to your existing repository or create separate repositories for each SRU.  The individual SRUs are self-sufficient and incremental - SRU4 includes all updates from SRU2 and SRU3.  With ZFS, you can also get both: A full repository with all updates and at the same time incremental ones up to each of the updates: # mount -o ro -F hsfs /tmp/sol-11-1111-sru4-05-incr-repo.iso /mnt # pkgrecv -s /mnt/repo -d /export/repo/sol11/repo '*' # umount /mnt # pkgrepo rebuild -s /export/repo/sol11/repo # zfs snapshot rpool/ai/repo/sol11@sru4 # zfs set snapdir=visible rpool/ai/repo/sol11 # svcadm restart svc:/application/pkg/server:default The normal repository is now updated to SRU4.  Thanks to the ZFS snapshots, there is also a valid repository of Solaris 11 11/11 without the update located at /export/repo/sol11/.zfs/snapshot/fcs . If you like, you can also create another repository service for each update, running on a separate port. But now lets continue with the AI server.  Just a little bit of reading in the dokumentation makes it clear that we will need to run a DHCP server for this.  Since I already have one active (for my SunRay installation) and since it's a good idea to have these kinds of services separate anyway, I decided to create this in a Zone.  So, let's create one first: # zfs create -o mountpoint=/export/install rpool/ai/install # zfs create -o mountpoint=/zones rpool/zones # zonecfg -z ai-server zonecfg:ai-server> create create: Using system default template 'SYSdefault' zonecfg:ai-server> set zonepath=/zones/ai-server zonecfg:ai-server> add dataset zonecfg:ai-server:dataset> set name=rpool/ai/install zonecfg:ai-server:dataset> set alias=install zonecfg:ai-server:dataset> end zonecfg:ai-server> commit zonecfg:ai-server> exit # zoneadm -z ai-server install # zoneadm -z ai-server boot ; zlogin -C ai-server Give it a hostname and IP address at first boot, and there's the Zone.  For a publisher for Solaris packages, it will be bound to the "System Publisher" from the Global Zone.  The /export/install filesystem, of course, is intended to be used by the AI server.  Let's configure it now: #zlogin ai-server root@ai-server:~# pkg install install/installadm root@ai-server:~# installadm create-service -n x86-fcs -a i386 \ -s pkg://solaris/install-image/[email protected],5.11-0.175.0.0.0.2.1482 \ -d /export/install/fcs -i 192.168.2.20 -c 3 With that, the core AI server is already done.  What happened here?  First, I installed the AI server software.  IPS makes that nice and easy.  If necessary, it'll also pull in the required DHCP-Server and anything else that might be missing.  Watch out for that DHCP server software.  In Solaris 11, there are two different versions.  There's the one you might know from Solaris 10 and earlier, and then there's a new one from ISC.  The latter is the one we need for AI.  The SMF service names of both are very similar.  The "old" one is "svc:/network/dhcp-server:default". The ISC-server comes with several SMF-services. We at least need "svc:/network/dhcp/server:ipv4".  The command "installadm create-service" creates the installation-service. It's called "x86-fcs", serves the "i386" architecture and gets its boot image from the repository of the system publisher, using version 5.11,5.11-0.175.0.0.0.2.1482, which is Solaris 11 11/11.  (The option "-a i386" in this example is optional, since the installserver itself runs on a x86 machine.) The boot-environment for clients is created in /export/install/fcs and the DHCP-server is configured for 3 IP-addresses starting at 192.168.2.20.  This configuration is stored in a very human readable form in /etc/inet/dhcpd4.conf.  An AI-service for SPARC systems could be created in the very same way, using "-a sparc" as the architecture option. Now we would be ready to register and install the first client.  It would be installed with the default "solaris-large-server" using the publisher "http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release" and would query it's configuration interactively at first boot.  This makes it very clear that an AI-server is really only a boot-server.  The true source of packets to install can be different.  Since I don't like these defaults for my demo setup, I did some extra config work for my clients. The configuration of a client is controlled by manifests and profiles.  The manifest controls which packets are installed and how the filesystems are layed out.  In that, it's very much like the old "rules.ok" file in Jumpstart.  Profiles contain additional configuration like root passwords, primary user account, IP addresses, keyboard layout etc.  Hence, profiles are very similar to the old sysid.cfg file. The easiest way to get your hands on a manifest is to ask the AI server we just created to give us it's default one.  Then modify that to our liking and give it back to the installserver to use: root@ai-server:~# mkdir -p /export/install/configs/manifests root@ai-server:~# cd /export/install/configs/manifests root@ai-server:~# installadm export -n x86-fcs -m orig_default \ -o orig_default.xml root@ai-server:~# cp orig_default.xml s11-fcs.small.local.xml root@ai-server:~# vi s11-fcs.small.local.xml root@ai-server:~# more s11-fcs.small.local.xml <!DOCTYPE auto_install SYSTEM "file:///usr/share/install/ai.dtd.1"> <auto_install> <ai_instance name="S11 Small fcs local"> <target> <logical> <zpool name="rpool" is_root="true"> <filesystem name="export" mountpoint="/export"/> <filesystem name="export/home"/> <be name="solaris"/> </zpool> </logical> </target> <software type="IPS"> <destination> <image> <!-- Specify locales to install --> <facet set="false">facet.locale.*</facet> <facet set="true">facet.locale.de</facet> <facet set="true">facet.locale.de_DE</facet> <facet set="true">facet.locale.en</facet> <facet set="true">facet.locale.en_US</facet> </image> </destination> <source> <publisher name="solaris"> <origin name="http://192.168.2.12/"/> </publisher> </source> <!-- By default the latest build available, in the specified IPS repository, is installed. If another build is required, the build number has to be appended to the 'entire' package in the following form: <name>pkg:/[email protected]#</name> --> <software_data action="install"> <name>pkg:/[email protected],5.11-0.175.0.0.0.2.0</name> <name>pkg:/group/system/solaris-small-server</name> </software_data> </software> </ai_instance> </auto_install> root@ai-server:~# installadm create-manifest -n x86-fcs -d \ -f ./s11-fcs.small.local.xml root@ai-server:~# installadm list -m -n x86-fcs Manifest Status Criteria -------- ------ -------- S11 Small fcs local Default None orig_default Inactive None The major points in this new manifest are: Install "solaris-small-server" Install a few locales less than the default.  I'm not that fluid in French or Japanese... Use my own package service as publisher, running on IP address 192.168.2.12 Install the initial release of Solaris 11:  pkg:/[email protected],5.11-0.175.0.0.0.2.0 Using a similar approach, I'll create a default profile interactively and use it as a template for a few customized building blocks, each defining a part of the overall system configuration.  The modular approach makes it easy to configure numerous clients later on: root@ai-server:~# mkdir -p /export/install/configs/profiles root@ai-server:~# cd /export/install/configs/profiles root@ai-server:~# sysconfig create-profile -o default.xml root@ai-server:~# cp default.xml general.xml; cp default.xml mars.xml root@ai-server:~# cp default.xml user.xml root@ai-server:~# vi general.xml mars.xml user.xml root@ai-server:~# more general.xml mars.xml user.xml :::::::::::::: general.xml :::::::::::::: <!DOCTYPE service_bundle SYSTEM "/usr/share/lib/xml/dtd/service_bundle.dtd.1"> <service_bundle type="profile" name="sysconfig"> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/timezone"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="application" name="timezone"> <propval type="astring" name="localtime" value="Europe/Berlin"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/environment"> <instance enabled="true" name="init"> <property_group type="application" name="environment"> <propval type="astring" name="LANG" value="C"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/keymap"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="system" name="keymap"> <propval type="astring" name="layout" value="US-English"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/console-login"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="application" name="ttymon"> <propval type="astring" name="terminal_type" value="vt100"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="network/physical"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="application" name="netcfg"> <propval type="astring" name="active_ncp" value="DefaultFixed"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/name-service/switch"> <property_group type="application" name="config"> <propval type="astring" name="default" value="files"/> <propval type="astring" name="host" value="files dns"/> <propval type="astring" name="printer" value="user files"/> </property_group> <instance enabled="true" name="default"/> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/name-service/cache"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"/> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="network/dns/client"> <property_group type="application" name="config"> <property type="net_address" name="nameserver"> <net_address_list> <value_node value="192.168.2.1"/> </net_address_list> </property> </property_group> <instance enabled="true" name="default"/> </service> </service_bundle> :::::::::::::: mars.xml :::::::::::::: <!DOCTYPE service_bundle SYSTEM "/usr/share/lib/xml/dtd/service_bundle.dtd.1"> <service_bundle type="profile" name="sysconfig"> <service version="1" type="service" name="network/install"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="application" name="install_ipv4_interface"> <propval type="astring" name="address_type" value="static"/> <propval type="net_address_v4" name="static_address" value="192.168.2.100/24"/> <propval type="astring" name="name" value="net0/v4"/> <propval type="net_address_v4" name="default_route" value="192.168.2.1"/> </property_group> <property_group type="application" name="install_ipv6_interface"> <propval type="astring" name="stateful" value="yes"/> <propval type="astring" name="stateless" value="yes"/> <propval type="astring" name="address_type" value="addrconf"/> <propval type="astring" name="name" value="net0/v6"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/identity"> <instance enabled="true" name="node"> <property_group type="application" name="config"> <propval type="astring" name="nodename" value="mars"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> </service_bundle> :::::::::::::: user.xml :::::::::::::: <!DOCTYPE service_bundle SYSTEM "/usr/share/lib/xml/dtd/service_bundle.dtd.1"> <service_bundle type="profile" name="sysconfig"> <service version="1" type="service" name="system/config-user"> <instance enabled="true" name="default"> <property_group type="application" name="root_account"> <propval type="astring" name="login" value="root"/> <propval type="astring" name="password" value="noIWillNotTellYouMyPasswordNotEvenEncrypted"/> <propval type="astring" name="type" value="role"/> </property_group> <property_group type="application" name="user_account"> <propval type="astring" name="login" value="stefan"/> <propval type="astring" name="password" value="noIWillNotTellYouMyPasswordNotEvenEncrypted"/> <propval type="astring" name="type" value="normal"/> <propval type="astring" name="description" value="Stefan Hinker"/> <propval type="count" name="uid" value="12345"/> <propval type="count" name="gid" value="10"/> <propval type="astring" name="shell" value="/usr/bin/bash"/> <propval type="astring" name="roles" value="root"/> <propval type="astring" name="profiles" value="System Administrator"/> <propval type="astring" name="sudoers" value="ALL=(ALL) ALL"/> </property_group> </instance> </service> </service_bundle> root@ai-server:~# installadm create-profile -n x86-fcs -f general.xml root@ai-server:~# installadm create-profile -n x86-fcs -f user.xml root@ai-server:~# installadm create-profile -n x86-fcs -f mars.xml \ -c ipv4=192.168.2.100 root@ai-server:~# installadm list -p Service Name Profile ------------ ------- x86-fcs general.xml mars.xml user.xml root@ai-server:~# installadm list -n x86-fcs -p Profile Criteria ------- -------- general.xml None mars.xml ipv4 = 192.168.2.100 user.xml None Here's the idea behind these files: "general.xml" contains settings valid for all my clients.  Stuff like DNS servers, for example, which in my case will always be the same. "user.xml" only contains user definitions.  That is, a root password and a primary user.Both of these profiles will be valid for all clients (for now). "mars.xml" defines network settings for an individual client.  This profile is associated with an IP-Address.  For this to work, I'll have to tweak the DHCP-settings in the next step: root@ai-server:~# installadm create-client -e 08:00:27:AA:3D:B1 -n x86-fcs root@ai-server:~# vi /etc/inet/dhcpd4.conf root@ai-server:~# tail -5 /etc/inet/dhcpd4.conf host 080027AA3DB1 { hardware ethernet 08:00:27:AA:3D:B1; fixed-address 192.168.2.100; filename "01080027AA3DB1"; } This completes the client preparations.  I manually added the IP-Address for mars to /etc/inet/dhcpd4.conf.  This is needed for the "mars.xml" profile.  Disabling arbitrary DHCP-replies will shut up this DHCP server, making my life in a shared environment a lot more peaceful ;-)Now, I of course want this installation to be completely hands-off.  For this to work, I'll need to modify the grub boot menu for this client slightly.  You can find it in /etc/netboot.  "installadm create-client" will create a new boot menu for every client, identified by the client's MAC address.  The template for this can be found in a subdirectory with the name of the install service, /etc/netboot/x86-fcs in our case.  If you don't want to change this manually for every client, modify that template to your liking instead. root@ai-server:~# cd /etc/netboot root@ai-server:~# cp menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1 menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1.org root@ai-server:~# vi menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1 root@ai-server:~# diff menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1 menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1.org 1,2c1,2 < default=1 < timeout=10 --- > default=0 > timeout=30 root@ai-server:~# more menu.lst.01080027AA3DB1 default=1 timeout=10 min_mem64=0 title Oracle Solaris 11 11/11 Text Installer and command line kernel$ /x86-fcs/platform/i86pc/kernel/$ISADIR/unix -B install_media=htt p://$serverIP:5555//export/install/fcs,install_service=x86-fcs,install_svc_addre ss=$serverIP:5555 module$ /x86-fcs/platform/i86pc/$ISADIR/boot_archive title Oracle Solaris 11 11/11 Automated Install kernel$ /x86-fcs/platform/i86pc/kernel/$ISADIR/unix -B install=true,inst all_media=http://$serverIP:5555//export/install/fcs,install_service=x86-fcs,inst all_svc_address=$serverIP:5555,livemode=text module$ /x86-fcs/platform/i86pc/$ISADIR/boot_archive Now just boot the client off the network using PXE-boot.  For my demo purposes, that's a client from VirtualBox, of course.  That's all there's to it.  And despite the fact that this blog entry is a little longer - that wasn't that hard now, was it?

    Read the article

  • How to find and fix performance problems in ORM powered applications

    - by FransBouma
    Once in a while we get requests about how to fix performance problems with our framework. As it comes down to following the same steps and looking into the same things every single time, I decided to write a blogpost about it instead, so more people can learn from this and solve performance problems in their O/R mapper powered applications. In some parts it's focused on LLBLGen Pro but it's also usable for other O/R mapping frameworks, as the vast majority of performance problems in O/R mapper powered applications are not specific for a certain O/R mapper framework. Too often, the developer looks at the wrong part of the application, trying to fix what isn't a problem in that part, and getting frustrated that 'things are so slow with <insert your favorite framework X here>'. I'm in the O/R mapper business for a long time now (almost 10 years, full time) and as it's a small world, we O/R mapper developers know almost all tricks to pull off by now: we all know what to do to make task ABC faster and what compromises (because there are almost always compromises) to deal with if we decide to make ABC faster that way. Some O/R mapper frameworks are faster in X, others in Y, but you can be sure the difference is mainly a result of a compromise some developers are willing to deal with and others aren't. That's why the O/R mapper frameworks on the market today are different in many ways, even though they all fetch and save entities from and to a database. I'm not suggesting there's no room for improvement in today's O/R mapper frameworks, there always is, but it's not a matter of 'the slowness of the application is caused by the O/R mapper' anymore. Perhaps query generation can be optimized a bit here, row materialization can be optimized a bit there, but it's mainly coming down to milliseconds. Still worth it if you're a framework developer, but it's not much compared to the time spend inside databases and in user code: if a complete fetch takes 40ms or 50ms (from call to entity object collection), it won't make a difference for your application as that 10ms difference won't be noticed. That's why it's very important to find the real locations of the problems so developers can fix them properly and don't get frustrated because their quest to get a fast, performing application failed. Performance tuning basics and rules Finding and fixing performance problems in any application is a strict procedure with four prescribed steps: isolate, analyze, interpret and fix, in that order. It's key that you don't skip a step nor make assumptions: these steps help you find the reason of a problem which seems to be there, and how to fix it or leave it as-is. Skipping a step, or when you assume things will be bad/slow without doing analysis will lead to the path of premature optimization and won't actually solve your problems, only create new ones. The most important rule of finding and fixing performance problems in software is that you have to understand what 'performance problem' actually means. Most developers will say "when a piece of software / code is slow, you have a performance problem". But is that actually the case? If I write a Linq query which will aggregate, group and sort 5 million rows from several tables to produce a resultset of 10 rows, it might take more than a couple of milliseconds before that resultset is ready to be consumed by other logic. If I solely look at the Linq query, the code consuming the resultset of the 10 rows and then look at the time it takes to complete the whole procedure, it will appear to me to be slow: all that time taken to produce and consume 10 rows? But if you look closer, if you analyze and interpret the situation, you'll see it does a tremendous amount of work, and in that light it might even be extremely fast. With every performance problem you encounter, always do realize that what you're trying to solve is perhaps not a technical problem at all, but a perception problem. The second most important rule you have to understand is based on the old saying "Penny wise, Pound Foolish": the part which takes e.g. 5% of the total time T for a given task isn't worth optimizing if you have another part which takes a much larger part of the total time T for that same given task. Optimizing parts which are relatively insignificant for the total time taken is not going to bring you better results overall, even if you totally optimize that part away. This is the core reason why analysis of the complete set of application parts which participate in a given task is key to being successful in solving performance problems: No analysis -> no problem -> no solution. One warning up front: hunting for performance will always include making compromises. Fast software can be made maintainable, but if you want to squeeze as much performance out of your software, you will inevitably be faced with the dilemma of compromising one or more from the group {readability, maintainability, features} for the extra performance you think you'll gain. It's then up to you to decide whether it's worth it. In almost all cases it's not. The reason for this is simple: the vast majority of performance problems can be solved by implementing the proper algorithms, the ones with proven Big O-characteristics so you know the performance you'll get plus you know the algorithm will work. The time taken by the algorithm implementing code is inevitable: you already implemented the best algorithm. You might find some optimizations on the technical level but in general these are minor. Let's look at the four steps to see how they guide us through the quest to find and fix performance problems. Isolate The first thing you need to do is to isolate the areas in your application which are assumed to be slow. For example, if your application is a web application and a given page is taking several seconds or even minutes to load, it's a good candidate to check out. It's important to start with the isolate step because it allows you to focus on a single code path per area with a clear begin and end and ignore the rest. The rest of the steps are taken per identified problematic area. Keep in mind that isolation focuses on tasks in an application, not code snippets. A task is something that's started in your application by either another task or the user, or another program, and has a beginning and an end. You can see a task as a piece of functionality offered by your application.  Analyze Once you've determined the problem areas, you have to perform analysis on the code paths of each area, to see where the performance problems occur and which areas are not the problem. This is a multi-layered effort: an application which uses an O/R mapper typically consists of multiple parts: there's likely some kind of interface (web, webservice, windows etc.), a part which controls the interface and business logic, the O/R mapper part and the RDBMS, all connected with either a network or inter-process connections provided by the OS or other means. Each of these parts, including the connectivity plumbing, eat up a part of the total time it takes to complete a task, e.g. load a webpage with all orders of a given customer X. To understand which parts participate in the task / area we're investigating and how much they contribute to the total time taken to complete the task, analysis of each participating task is essential. Start with the code you wrote which starts the task, analyze the code and track the path it follows through your application. What does the code do along the way, verify whether it's correct or not. Analyze whether you have implemented the right algorithms in your code for this particular area. Remember we're looking at one area at a time, which means we're ignoring all other code paths, just the code path of the current problematic area, from begin to end and back. Don't dig in and start optimizing at the code level just yet. We're just analyzing. If your analysis reveals big architectural stupidity, it's perhaps a good idea to rethink the architecture at this point. For the rest, we're analyzing which means we collect data about what could be wrong, for each participating part of the complete application. Reviewing the code you wrote is a good tool to get deeper understanding of what is going on for a given task but ultimately it lacks precision and overview what really happens: humans aren't good code interpreters, computers are. We therefore need to utilize tools to get deeper understanding about which parts contribute how much time to the total task, triggered by which other parts and for example how many times are they called. There are two different kind of tools which are necessary: .NET profilers and O/R mapper / RDBMS profilers. .NET profiling .NET profilers (e.g. dotTrace by JetBrains or Ants by Red Gate software) show exactly which pieces of code are called, how many times they're called, and the time it took to run that piece of code, at the method level and sometimes even at the line level. The .NET profilers are essential tools for understanding whether the time taken to complete a given task / area in your application is consumed by .NET code, where exactly in your code, the path to that code, how many times that code was called by other code and thus reveals where hotspots are located: the areas where a solution can be found. Importantly, they also reveal which areas can be left alone: remember our penny wise pound foolish saying: if a profiler reveals that a group of methods are fast, or don't contribute much to the total time taken for a given task, ignore them. Even if the code in them is perhaps complex and looks like a candidate for optimization: you can work all day on that, it won't matter.  As we're focusing on a single area of the application, it's best to start profiling right before you actually activate the task/area. Most .NET profilers support this by starting the application without starting the profiling procedure just yet. You navigate to the particular part which is slow, start profiling in the profiler, in your application you perform the actions which are considered slow, and afterwards you get a snapshot in the profiler. The snapshot contains the data collected by the profiler during the slow action, so most data is produced by code in the area to investigate. This is important, because it allows you to stay focused on a single area. O/R mapper and RDBMS profiling .NET profilers give you a good insight in the .NET side of things, but not in the RDBMS side of the application. As this article is about O/R mapper powered applications, we're also looking at databases, and the software making it possible to consume the database in your application: the O/R mapper. To understand which parts of the O/R mapper and database participate how much to the total time taken for task T, we need different tools. There are two kind of tools focusing on O/R mappers and database performance profiling: O/R mapper profilers and RDBMS profilers. For O/R mapper profilers, you can look at LLBLGen Prof by hibernating rhinos or the Linq to Sql/LLBLGen Pro profiler by Huagati. Hibernating rhinos also have profilers for other O/R mappers like NHibernate (NHProf) and Entity Framework (EFProf) and work the same as LLBLGen Prof. For RDBMS profilers, you have to look whether the RDBMS vendor has a profiler. For example for SQL Server, the profiler is shipped with SQL Server, for Oracle it's build into the RDBMS, however there are also 3rd party tools. Which tool you're using isn't really important, what's important is that you get insight in which queries are executed during the task / area we're currently focused on and how long they took. Here, the O/R mapper profilers have an advantage as they collect the time it took to execute the query from the application's perspective so they also collect the time it took to transport data across the network. This is important because a query which returns a massive resultset or a resultset with large blob/clob/ntext/image fields takes more time to get transported across the network than a small resultset and a database profiler doesn't take this into account most of the time. Another tool to use in this case, which is more low level and not all O/R mappers support it (though LLBLGen Pro and NHibernate as well do) is tracing: most O/R mappers offer some form of tracing or logging system which you can use to collect the SQL generated and executed and often also other activity behind the scenes. While tracing can produce a tremendous amount of data in some cases, it also gives insight in what's going on. Interpret After we've completed the analysis step it's time to look at the data we've collected. We've done code reviews to see whether we've done anything stupid and which parts actually take place and if the proper algorithms have been implemented. We've done .NET profiling to see which parts are choke points and how much time they contribute to the total time taken to complete the task we're investigating. We've performed O/R mapper profiling and RDBMS profiling to see which queries were executed during the task, how many queries were generated and executed and how long they took to complete, including network transportation. All this data reveals two things: which parts are big contributors to the total time taken and which parts are irrelevant. Both aspects are very important. The parts which are irrelevant (i.e. don't contribute significantly to the total time taken) can be ignored from now on, we won't look at them. The parts which contribute a lot to the total time taken are important to look at. We now have to first look at the .NET profiler results, to see whether the time taken is consumed in our own code, in .NET framework code, in the O/R mapper itself or somewhere else. For example if most of the time is consumed by DbCommand.ExecuteReader, the time it took to complete the task is depending on the time the data is fetched from the database. If there was just 1 query executed, according to tracing or O/R mapper profilers / RDBMS profilers, check whether that query is optimal, uses indexes or has to deal with a lot of data. Interpret means that you follow the path from begin to end through the data collected and determine where, along the path, the most time is contributed. It also means that you have to check whether this was expected or is totally unexpected. My previous example of the 10 row resultset of a query which groups millions of rows will likely reveal that a long time is spend inside the database and almost no time is spend in the .NET code, meaning the RDBMS part contributes the most to the total time taken, the rest is compared to that time, irrelevant. Considering the vastness of the source data set, it's expected this will take some time. However, does it need tweaking? Perhaps all possible tweaks are already in place. In the interpret step you then have to decide that further action in this area is necessary or not, based on what the analysis results show: if the analysis results were unexpected and in the area where the most time is contributed to the total time taken is room for improvement, action should be taken. If not, you can only accept the situation and move on. In all cases, document your decision together with the analysis you've done. If you decide that the perceived performance problem is actually expected due to the nature of the task performed, it's essential that in the future when someone else looks at the application and starts asking questions you can answer them properly and new analysis is only necessary if situations changed. Fix After interpreting the analysis results you've concluded that some areas need adjustment. This is the fix step: you're actively correcting the performance problem with proper action targeted at the real cause. In many cases related to O/R mapper powered applications it means you'll use different features of the O/R mapper to achieve the same goal, or apply optimizations at the RDBMS level. It could also mean you apply caching inside your application (compromise memory consumption over performance) to avoid unnecessary re-querying data and re-consuming the results. After applying a change, it's key you re-do the analysis and interpretation steps: compare the results and expectations with what you had before, to see whether your actions had any effect or whether it moved the problem to a different part of the application. Don't fall into the trap to do partly analysis: do the full analysis again: .NET profiling and O/R mapper / RDBMS profiling. It might very well be that the changes you've made make one part faster but another part significantly slower, in such a way that the overall problem hasn't changed at all. Performance tuning is dealing with compromises and making choices: to use one feature over the other, to accept a higher memory footprint, to go away from the strict-OO path and execute queries directly onto the RDBMS, these are choices and compromises which will cross your path if you want to fix performance problems with respect to O/R mappers or data-access and databases in general. In most cases it's not a big issue: alternatives are often good choices too and the compromises aren't that hard to deal with. What is important is that you document why you made a choice, a compromise: which analysis data, which interpretation led you to the choice made. This is key for good maintainability in the years to come. Most common performance problems with O/R mappers Below is an incomplete list of common performance problems related to data-access / O/R mappers / RDBMS code. It will help you with fixing the hotspots you found in the interpretation step. SELECT N+1: (Lazy-loading specific). Lazy loading triggered performance bottlenecks. Consider a list of Orders bound to a grid. You have a Field mapped onto a related field in Order, Customer.CompanyName. Showing this column in the grid will make the grid fetch (indirectly) for each row the Customer row. This means you'll get for the single list not 1 query (for the orders) but 1+(the number of orders shown) queries. To solve this: use eager loading using a prefetch path to fetch the customers with the orders. SELECT N+1 is easy to spot with an O/R mapper profiler or RDBMS profiler: if you see a lot of identical queries executed at once, you have this problem. Prefetch paths using many path nodes or sorting, or limiting. Eager loading problem. Prefetch paths can help with performance, but as 1 query is fetched per node, it can be the number of data fetched in a child node is bigger than you think. Also consider that data in every node is merged on the client within the parent. This is fast, but it also can take some time if you fetch massive amounts of entities. If you keep fetches small, you can use tuning parameters like the ParameterizedPrefetchPathThreshold setting to get more optimal queries. Deep inheritance hierarchies of type Target Per Entity/Type. If you use inheritance of type Target per Entity / Type (each type in the inheritance hierarchy is mapped onto its own table/view), fetches will join subtype- and supertype tables in many cases, which can lead to a lot of performance problems if the hierarchy has many types. With this problem, keep inheritance to a minimum if possible, or switch to a hierarchy of type Target Per Hierarchy, which means all entities in the inheritance hierarchy are mapped onto the same table/view. Of course this has its own set of drawbacks, but it's a compromise you might want to take. Fetching massive amounts of data by fetching large lists of entities. LLBLGen Pro supports paging (and limiting the # of rows returned), which is often key to process through large sets of data. Use paging on the RDBMS if possible (so a query is executed which returns only the rows in the page requested). When using paging in a web application, be sure that you switch server-side paging on on the datasourcecontrol used. In this case, paging on the grid alone is not enough: this can lead to fetching a lot of data which is then loaded into the grid and paged there. Keep note that analyzing queries for paging could lead to the false assumption that paging doesn't occur, e.g. when the query contains a field of type ntext/image/clob/blob and DISTINCT can't be applied while it should have (e.g. due to a join): the datareader will do DISTINCT filtering on the client. this is a little slower but it does perform paging functionality on the data-reader so it won't fetch all rows even if the query suggests it does. Fetch massive amounts of data because blob/clob/ntext/image fields aren't excluded. LLBLGen Pro supports field exclusion for queries. You can exclude fields (also in prefetch paths) per query to avoid fetching all fields of an entity, e.g. when you don't need them for the logic consuming the resultset. Excluding fields can greatly reduce the amount of time spend on data-transport across the network. Use this optimization if you see that there's a big difference between query execution time on the RDBMS and the time reported by the .NET profiler for the ExecuteReader method call. Doing client-side aggregates/scalar calculations by consuming a lot of data. If possible, try to formulate a scalar query or group by query using the projection system or GetScalar functionality of LLBLGen Pro to do data consumption on the RDBMS server. It's far more efficient to process data on the RDBMS server than to first load it all in memory, then traverse the data in-memory to calculate a value. Using .ToList() constructs inside linq queries. It might be you use .ToList() somewhere in a Linq query which makes the query be run partially in-memory. Example: var q = from c in metaData.Customers.ToList() where c.Country=="Norway" select c; This will actually fetch all customers in-memory and do an in-memory filtering, as the linq query is defined on an IEnumerable<T>, and not on the IQueryable<T>. Linq is nice, but it can often be a bit unclear where some parts of a Linq query might run. Fetching all entities to delete into memory first. To delete a set of entities it's rather inefficient to first fetch them all into memory and then delete them one by one. It's more efficient to execute a DELETE FROM ... WHERE query on the database directly to delete the entities in one go. LLBLGen Pro supports this feature, and so do some other O/R mappers. It's not always possible to do this operation in the context of an O/R mapper however: if an O/R mapper relies on a cache, these kind of operations are likely not supported because they make it impossible to track whether an entity is actually removed from the DB and thus can be removed from the cache. Fetching all entities to update with an expression into memory first. Similar to the previous point: it is more efficient to update a set of entities directly with a single UPDATE query using an expression instead of fetching the entities into memory first and then updating the entities in a loop, and afterwards saving them. It might however be a compromise you don't want to take as it is working around the idea of having an object graph in memory which is manipulated and instead makes the code fully aware there's a RDBMS somewhere. Conclusion Performance tuning is almost always about compromises and making choices. It's also about knowing where to look and how the systems in play behave and should behave. The four steps I provided should help you stay focused on the real problem and lead you towards the solution. Knowing how to optimally use the systems participating in your own code (.NET framework, O/R mapper, RDBMS, network/services) is key for success as well as knowing what's going on inside the application you built. I hope you'll find this guide useful in tracking down performance problems and dealing with them in a useful way.  

    Read the article

  • Ancillary Objects: Separate Debug ELF Files For Solaris

    - by Ali Bahrami
    We introduced a new object ELF object type in Solaris 11 Update 1 called the Ancillary Object. This posting describes them, using material originally written during their development, the PSARC arc case, and the Solaris Linker and Libraries Manual. ELF objects contain allocable sections, which are mapped into memory at runtime, and non-allocable sections, which are present in the file for use by debuggers and observability tools, but which are not mapped or used at runtime. Typically, all of these sections exist within a single object file. Ancillary objects allow them to instead go into a separate file. There are different reasons given for wanting such a feature. One can debate whether the added complexity is worth the benefit, and in most cases it is not. However, one important case stands out — customers with very large 32-bit objects who are not ready or able to make the transition to 64-bits. We have customers who build extremely large 32-bit objects. Historically, the debug sections in these objects have used the stabs format, which is limited, but relatively compact. In recent years, the industry has transitioned to the powerful but verbose DWARF standard. In some cases, the size of these debug sections is large enough to push the total object file size past the fundamental 4GB limit for 32-bit ELF object files. The best, and ultimately only, solution to overly large objects is to transition to 64-bits. However, consider environments where: Hundreds of users may be executing the code on large shared systems. (32-bits use less memory and bus bandwidth, and on sparc runs just as fast as 64-bit code otherwise). Complex finely tuned code, where the original authors may no longer be available. Critical production code, that was expensive to qualify and bring online, and which is otherwise serving its intended purpose without issue. Users in these risk adverse and/or high scale categories have good reasons to push 32-bits objects to the limit before moving on. Ancillary objects offer these users a longer runway. Design The design of ancillary objects is intended to be simple, both to help human understanding when examining elfdump output, and to lower the bar for debuggers such as dbx to support them. The primary and ancillary objects have the same set of section headers, with the same names, in the same order (i.e. each section has the same index in both files). A single added section of type SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY is added to both objects, containing information that allows a debugger to identify and validate both files relative to each other. Given one of these files, the ancillary section allows you to identify the other. Allocable sections go in the primary object, and non-allocable ones go into the ancillary object. A small set of non-allocable objects, notably the symbol table, are copied into both objects. As noted above, most sections are only written to one of the two objects, but both objects have the same section header array. The section header in the file that does not contain the section data is tagged with the SHF_SUNW_ABSENT section header flag to indicate its placeholder status. Compiler writers and others who produce objects can set the SUNW_SHF_PRIMARY section header flag to mark non-allocable sections that should go to the primary object rather than the ancillary. If you don't request an ancillary object, the Solaris ELF format is unchanged. Users who don't use ancillary objects do not pay for the feature. This is important, because they exist to serve a small subset of our users, and must not complicate the common case. If you do request an ancillary object, the runtime behavior of the primary object will be the same as that of a normal object. There is no added runtime cost. The primary and ancillary object together represent a logical single object. This is facilitated by the use of a single set of section headers. One can easily imagine a tool that can merge a primary and ancillary object into a single file, or the reverse. (Note that although this is an interesting intellectual exercise, we don't actually supply such a tool because there's little practical benefit above and beyond using ld to create the files). Among the benefits of this approach are: There is no need for per-file symbol tables to reflect the contents of each file. The same symbol table that would be produced for a standard object can be used. The section contents are identical in either case — there is no need to alter data to accommodate multiple files. It is very easy for a debugger to adapt to these new files, and the processing involved can be encapsulated in input/output routines. Most of the existing debugger implementation applies without modification. The limit of a 4GB 32-bit output object is now raised to 4GB of code, and 4GB of debug data. There is also the future possibility (not currently supported) to support multiple ancillary objects, each of which could contain up to 4GB of additional debug data. It must be noted however that the 32-bit DWARF debug format is itself inherently 32-bit limited, as it uses 32-bit offsets between debug sections, so the ability to employ multiple ancillary object files may not turn out to be useful. Using Ancillary Objects (From the Solaris Linker and Libraries Guide) By default, objects contain both allocable and non-allocable sections. Allocable sections are the sections that contain executable code and the data needed by that code at runtime. Non-allocable sections contain supplemental information that is not required to execute an object at runtime. These sections support the operation of debuggers and other observability tools. The non-allocable sections in an object are not loaded into memory at runtime by the operating system, and so, they have no impact on memory use or other aspects of runtime performance no matter their size. For convenience, both allocable and non-allocable sections are normally maintained in the same file. However, there are situations in which it can be useful to separate these sections. To reduce the size of objects in order to improve the speed at which they can be copied across wide area networks. To support fine grained debugging of highly optimized code requires considerable debug data. In modern systems, the debugging data can easily be larger than the code it describes. The size of a 32-bit object is limited to 4 Gbytes. In very large 32-bit objects, the debug data can cause this limit to be exceeded and prevent the creation of the object. To limit the exposure of internal implementation details. Traditionally, objects have been stripped of non-allocable sections in order to address these issues. Stripping is effective, but destroys data that might be needed later. The Solaris link-editor can instead write non-allocable sections to an ancillary object. This feature is enabled with the -z ancillary command line option. $ ld ... -z ancillary[=outfile] ...By default, the ancillary file is given the same name as the primary output object, with a .anc file extension. However, a different name can be provided by providing an outfile value to the -z ancillary option. When -z ancillary is specified, the link-editor performs the following actions. All allocable sections are written to the primary object. In addition, all non-allocable sections containing one or more input sections that have the SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY section header flag set are written to the primary object. All remaining non-allocable sections are written to the ancillary object. The following non-allocable sections are written to both the primary object and ancillary object. .shstrtab The section name string table. .symtab The full non-dynamic symbol table. .symtab_shndx The symbol table extended index section associated with .symtab. .strtab The non-dynamic string table associated with .symtab. .SUNW_ancillary Contains the information required to identify the primary and ancillary objects, and to identify the object being examined. The primary object and all ancillary objects contain the same array of sections headers. Each section has the same section index in every file. Although the primary and ancillary objects all define the same section headers, the data for most sections will be written to a single file as described above. If the data for a section is not present in a given file, the SHF_SUNW_ABSENT section header flag is set, and the sh_size field is 0. This organization makes it possible to acquire a full list of section headers, a complete symbol table, and a complete list of the primary and ancillary objects from either of the primary or ancillary objects. The following example illustrates the underlying implementation of ancillary objects. An ancillary object is created by adding the -z ancillary command line option to an otherwise normal compilation. The file utility shows that the result is an executable named a.out, and an associated ancillary object named a.out.anc. $ cat hello.c #include <stdio.h> int main(int argc, char **argv) { (void) printf("hello, world\n"); return (0); } $ cc -g -zancillary hello.c $ file a.out a.out.anc a.out: ELF 32-bit LSB executable 80386 Version 1 [FPU], dynamically linked, not stripped, ancillary object a.out.anc a.out.anc: ELF 32-bit LSB ancillary 80386 Version 1, primary object a.out $ ./a.out hello worldThe resulting primary object is an ordinary executable that can be executed in the usual manner. It is no different at runtime than an executable built without the use of ancillary objects, and then stripped of non-allocable content using the strip or mcs commands. As previously described, the primary object and ancillary objects contain the same section headers. To see how this works, it is helpful to use the elfdump utility to display these section headers and compare them. The following table shows the section header information for a selection of headers from the previous link-edit example. Index Section Name Type Primary Flags Ancillary Flags Primary Size Ancillary Size 13 .text PROGBITS ALLOC EXECINSTR ALLOC EXECINSTR SUNW_ABSENT 0x131 0 20 .data PROGBITS WRITE ALLOC WRITE ALLOC SUNW_ABSENT 0x4c 0 21 .symtab SYMTAB 0 0 0x450 0x450 22 .strtab STRTAB STRINGS STRINGS 0x1ad 0x1ad 24 .debug_info PROGBITS SUNW_ABSENT 0 0 0x1a7 28 .shstrtab STRTAB STRINGS STRINGS 0x118 0x118 29 .SUNW_ancillary SUNW_ancillary 0 0 0x30 0x30 The data for most sections is only present in one of the two files, and absent from the other file. The SHF_SUNW_ABSENT section header flag is set when the data is absent. The data for allocable sections needed at runtime are found in the primary object. The data for non-allocable sections used for debugging but not needed at runtime are placed in the ancillary file. A small set of non-allocable sections are fully present in both files. These are the .SUNW_ancillary section used to relate the primary and ancillary objects together, the section name string table .shstrtab, as well as the symbol table.symtab, and its associated string table .strtab. It is possible to strip the symbol table from the primary object. A debugger that encounters an object without a symbol table can use the .SUNW_ancillary section to locate the ancillary object, and access the symbol contained within. The primary object, and all associated ancillary objects, contain a .SUNW_ancillary section that allows all the objects to be identified and related together. $ elfdump -T SUNW_ancillary a.out a.out.anc a.out: Ancillary Section: .SUNW_ancillary index tag value [0] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0x8724 [1] ANC_SUNW_MEMBER 0x1 a.out [2] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0x8724 [3] ANC_SUNW_MEMBER 0x1a3 a.out.anc [4] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0xfbe2 [5] ANC_SUNW_NULL 0 a.out.anc: Ancillary Section: .SUNW_ancillary index tag value [0] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0xfbe2 [1] ANC_SUNW_MEMBER 0x1 a.out [2] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0x8724 [3] ANC_SUNW_MEMBER 0x1a3 a.out.anc [4] ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM 0xfbe2 [5] ANC_SUNW_NULL 0 The ancillary sections for both objects contain the same number of elements, and are identical except for the first element. Each object, starting with the primary object, is introduced with a MEMBER element that gives the file name, followed by a CHECKSUM that identifies the object. In this example, the primary object is a.out, and has a checksum of 0x8724. The ancillary object is a.out.anc, and has a checksum of 0xfbe2. The first element in a .SUNW_ancillary section, preceding the MEMBER element for the primary object, is always a CHECKSUM element, containing the checksum for the file being examined. The presence of a .SUNW_ancillary section in an object indicates that the object has associated ancillary objects. The names of the primary and all associated ancillary objects can be obtained from the ancillary section from any one of the files. It is possible to determine which file is being examined from the larger set of files by comparing the first checksum value to the checksum of each member that follows. Debugger Access and Use of Ancillary Objects Debuggers and other observability tools must merge the information found in the primary and ancillary object files in order to build a complete view of the object. This is equivalent to processing the information from a single file. This merging is simplified by the primary object and ancillary objects containing the same section headers, and a single symbol table. The following steps can be used by a debugger to assemble the information contained in these files. Starting with the primary object, or any of the ancillary objects, locate the .SUNW_ancillary section. The presence of this section identifies the object as part of an ancillary group, contains information that can be used to obtain a complete list of the files and determine which of those files is the one currently being examined. Create a section header array in memory, using the section header array from the object being examined as an initial template. Open and read each file identified by the .SUNW_ancillary section in turn. For each file, fill in the in-memory section header array with the information for each section that does not have the SHF_SUNW_ABSENT flag set. The result will be a complete in-memory copy of the section headers with pointers to the data for all sections. Once this information has been acquired, the debugger can proceed as it would in the single file case, to access and control the running program. Note - The ELF definition of ancillary objects provides for a single primary object, and an arbitrary number of ancillary objects. At this time, the Oracle Solaris link-editor only produces a single ancillary object containing all non-allocable sections. This may change in the future. Debuggers and other observability tools should be written to handle the general case of multiple ancillary objects. ELF Implementation Details (From the Solaris Linker and Libraries Guide) To implement ancillary objects, it was necessary to extend the ELF format to add a new object type (ET_SUNW_ANCILLARY), a new section type (SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY), and 2 new section header flags (SHF_SUNW_ABSENT, SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY). In this section, I will detail these changes, in the form of diffs to the Solaris Linker and Libraries manual. Part IV ELF Application Binary Interface Chapter 13: Object File Format Object File Format Edit Note: This existing section at the beginning of the chapter describes the ELF header. There's a table of object file types, which now includes the new ET_SUNW_ANCILLARY type. e_type Identifies the object file type, as listed in the following table. NameValueMeaning ET_NONE0No file type ET_REL1Relocatable file ET_EXEC2Executable file ET_DYN3Shared object file ET_CORE4Core file ET_LOSUNW0xfefeStart operating system specific range ET_SUNW_ANCILLARY0xfefeAncillary object file ET_HISUNW0xfefdEnd operating system specific range ET_LOPROC0xff00Start processor-specific range ET_HIPROC0xffffEnd processor-specific range Sections Edit Note: This overview section defines the section header structure, and provides a high level description of known sections. It was updated to define the new SHF_SUNW_ABSENT and SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY flags and the new SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY section. ... sh_type Categorizes the section's contents and semantics. Section types and their descriptions are listed in Table 13-5. sh_flags Sections support 1-bit flags that describe miscellaneous attributes. Flag definitions are listed in Table 13-8. ... Table 13-5 ELF Section Types, sh_type NameValue . . . SHT_LOSUNW0x6fffffee SHT_SUNW_ancillary0x6fffffee . . . ... SHT_LOSUNW - SHT_HISUNW Values in this inclusive range are reserved for Oracle Solaris OS semantics. SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY Present when a given object is part of a group of ancillary objects. Contains information required to identify all the files that make up the group. See Ancillary Section. ... Table 13-8 ELF Section Attribute Flags NameValue . . . SHF_MASKOS0x0ff00000 SHF_SUNW_NODISCARD0x00100000 SHF_SUNW_ABSENT0x00200000 SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY0x00400000 SHF_MASKPROC0xf0000000 . . . ... SHF_SUNW_ABSENT Indicates that the data for this section is not present in this file. When ancillary objects are created, the primary object and any ancillary objects, will all have the same section header array, to facilitate merging them to form a complete view of the object, and to allow them to use the same symbol tables. Each file contains a subset of the section data. The data for allocable sections is written to the primary object while the data for non-allocable sections is written to an ancillary file. The SHF_SUNW_ABSENT flag is used to indicate that the data for the section is not present in the object being examined. When the SHF_SUNW_ABSENT flag is set, the sh_size field of the section header must be 0. An application encountering an SHF_SUNW_ABSENT section can choose to ignore the section, or to search for the section data within one of the related ancillary files. SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY The default behavior when ancillary objects are created is to write all allocable sections to the primary object and all non-allocable sections to the ancillary objects. The SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY flag overrides this behavior. Any output section containing one more input section with the SHF_SUNW_PRIMARY flag set is written to the primary object without regard for its allocable status. ... Two members in the section header, sh_link, and sh_info, hold special information, depending on section type. Table 13-9 ELF sh_link and sh_info Interpretation sh_typesh_linksh_info . . . SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY The section header index of the associated string table. 0 . . . Special Sections Edit Note: This section describes the sections used in Solaris ELF objects, using the types defined in the previous description of section types. It was updated to define the new .SUNW_ancillary (SHT_SUNW_ANCILLARY) section. Various sections hold program and control information. Sections in the following table are used by the system and have the indicated types and attributes. Table 13-10 ELF Special Sections NameTypeAttribute . . . .SUNW_ancillarySHT_SUNW_ancillaryNone . . . ... .SUNW_ancillary Present when a given object is part of a group of ancillary objects. Contains information required to identify all the files that make up the group. See Ancillary Section for details. ... Ancillary Section Edit Note: This new section provides the format reference describing the layout of a .SUNW_ancillary section and the meaning of the various tags. Note that these sections use the same tag/value concept used for dynamic and capabilities sections, and will be familiar to anyone used to working with ELF. In addition to the primary output object, the Solaris link-editor can produce one or more ancillary objects. Ancillary objects contain non-allocable sections that would normally be written to the primary object. When ancillary objects are produced, the primary object and all of the associated ancillary objects contain a SHT_SUNW_ancillary section, containing information that identifies these related objects. Given any one object from such a group, the ancillary section provides the information needed to identify and interpret the others. This section contains an array of the following structures. See sys/elf.h. typedef struct { Elf32_Word a_tag; union { Elf32_Word a_val; Elf32_Addr a_ptr; } a_un; } Elf32_Ancillary; typedef struct { Elf64_Xword a_tag; union { Elf64_Xword a_val; Elf64_Addr a_ptr; } a_un; } Elf64_Ancillary; For each object with this type, a_tag controls the interpretation of a_un. a_val These objects represent integer values with various interpretations. a_ptr These objects represent file offsets or addresses. The following ancillary tags exist. Table 13-NEW1 ELF Ancillary Array Tags NameValuea_un ANC_SUNW_NULL0Ignored ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM1a_val ANC_SUNW_MEMBER2a_ptr ANC_SUNW_NULL Marks the end of the ancillary section. ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM Provides the checksum for a file in the c_val element. When ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM precedes the first instance of ANC_SUNW_MEMBER, it provides the checksum for the object from which the ancillary section is being read. When it follows an ANC_SUNW_MEMBER tag, it provides the checksum for that member. ANC_SUNW_MEMBER Specifies an object name. The a_ptr element contains the string table offset of a null-terminated string, that provides the file name. An ancillary section must always contain an ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM before the first instance of ANC_SUNW_MEMBER, identifying the current object. Following that, there should be an ANC_SUNW_MEMBER for each object that makes up the complete set of objects. Each ANC_SUNW_MEMBER should be followed by an ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM for that object. A typical ancillary section will therefore be structured as: TagMeaning ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUMChecksum of this object ANC_SUNW_MEMBERName of object #1 ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUMChecksum for object #1 . . . ANC_SUNW_MEMBERName of object N ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUMChecksum for object N ANC_SUNW_NULL An object can therefore identify itself by comparing the initial ANC_SUNW_CHECKSUM to each of the ones that follow, until it finds a match. Related Other Work The GNU developers have also encountered the need/desire to support separate debug information files, and use the solution detailed at http://sourceware.org/gdb/onlinedocs/gdb/Separate-Debug-Files.html. At the current time, the separate debug file is constructed by building the standard object first, and then copying the debug data out of it in a separate post processing step, Hence, it is limited to a total of 4GB of code and debug data, just as a single object file would be. They are aware of this, and I have seen online comments indicating that they may add direct support for generating these separate files to their link-editor. It is worth noting that the GNU objcopy utility is available on Solaris, and that the Studio dbx debugger is able to use these GNU style separate debug files even on Solaris. Although this is interesting in terms giving Linux users a familiar environment on Solaris, the 4GB limit means it is not an answer to the problem of very large 32-bit objects. We have also encountered issues with objcopy not understanding Solaris-specific ELF sections, when using this approach. The GNU community also has a current effort to adapt their DWARF debug sections in order to move them to separate files before passing the relocatable objects to the linker. The details of Project Fission can be found at http://gcc.gnu.org/wiki/DebugFission. The goal of this project appears to be to reduce the amount of data seen by the link-editor. The primary effort revolves around moving DWARF data to separate .dwo files so that the link-editor never encounters them. The details of modifying the DWARF data to be usable in this form are involved — please see the above URL for details.

    Read the article

  • Configuring Oracle iPlanet WebServer / Oracle Traffic Director to use crypto accelerators on T4-1 servers

    - by mv
    Configuring Oracle iPlanet Web Server / Oracle Traffic Director to use crypto accelerators on T4-1 servers Jyri had written a technical article on Configuring Solaris Cryptographic Framework and Sun Java System Web Server 7 on Systems With UltraSPARC T1 Processors. I tried to find out what has changed since then in T4. I have used a T4-1 SPARC system with Solaris 10. Results slightly vary for Solaris 11.  For Solaris 11, the T4 optimization was implemented in libsoftcrypto.so while it was in pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so for Solaris 10. Overview of T4 processors is here in this blog. Many thanx to Chi-Chang Lin and Julien for their help. 1. Install Oracle iPlanet Web Server / Oracle Traffic Director.  Go to instance/config directory.  # cd /opt/oracle/webserver7/https-hostname.fqdn/config 2. List default PKCS#11 Modules # ../../bin/modutil -dbdir . -listListing of PKCS #11 Modules-----------------------------------------------------------1. NSS Internal PKCS #11 Moduleslots: 2 slots attachedstatus: loadedslot: NSS Internal Cryptographic Servicestoken: NSS Generic Crypto Servicesslot: NSS User Private Key and Certificate Servicestoken: NSS Certificate DB2. Root Certslibrary name: libnssckbi.soslots: 1 slot attachedstatus: loadedslot: NSS Builtin Objectstoken: Builtin Object Token----------------------------------------------------------- 3. Initialize the soft token data store in the $HOME/.sunw/pkcs11_softtoken/ directory # pktool setpin keystore=pkcs11Enter token passphrase: olderpasswordCreate new passphrase: passwordRe-enter new passphrase: passwordPassphrase changed. 4. Offload crypto operations to Solaris Crypto Framework on T4 $ ../../bin/modutil -dbdir . -nocertdb -add SCF -libfile /usr/lib/libpkcs11.so -mechanisms RSA:AES:SHA1:MD5 Module "SCF" added to database. Note that -nocertdb means modutil won't try to open the NSS softoken key database. It doesn't even have to be present. PKCS#11 library used is /usr/lib/libpkcs11.so. If the server is running in 64 bit mode, we have to use /usr/lib/64/libpkcs11.so Unlike T1 and T2, in T4 we do not have to disable mechanisms in softtoken provider using cryptoadm. 5. List again to check that a new module SCF is added # ../../bin/modutil -dbdir . -list Listing of PKCS #11 Modules-----------------------------------------------------------1. NSS Internal PKCS #11 Moduleslots: 2 slots attachedstatus: loadedslot: NSS Internal Cryptographic Servicestoken: NSS Generic Crypto Servicesslot: NSS User Private Key and Certificate Servicestoken: NSS Certificate DB2. SCFlibrary name: /usr/lib/libpkcs11.soslots: 2 slots attachedstatus: loadedslot: Sun Metaslottoken: Sun Metaslotslot: n2rng/0 SUNW_N2_Random_Number_Generator token: n2rng/0 SUNW_N2_RNG 3. Root Certs library name: libnssckbi.so slots: 1 slot attached status: loaded slot: NSS Builtin Objects token: Builtin Object Token----------------------------------------------------------- 6.  Create certificate in “Sun Metaslot” : I have used certutil, but you must use Admin Server CLI / GUI # ../../bin/certutil -S -x -n "Server-Cert" -t "CT,CT,CT" -s "CN=*.fqdn" -d . -h "Sun Metaslot"Enter Password or Pin for "Sun Metaslot": password 7. Verify that the certificate is created properly in “Sun Metslaot” # ../../bin/certutil -L -d . -h "Sun Metaslot"Certificate Nickname Trust AttributesSSL,S/MIME,JAR/XPIEnter Password or Pin for "Sun Metaslot": passwordSun Metaslot:Server-Cert CTu,Cu,Cu# 8. Associate this newly created certificate to http listener using Admin CLI/GUI. After that server.xml should have <http-listener> ...    <ssl>        <server-cert-nickname>Sun Metaslot:Server-Cert</server-cert-nicknamer>    </ssl> Note the prefix "Sun Metaslot" 9. Disable PKCS#11 bypass To use the accelerated AES algorithm, turn off PKCS#11 bypass, and configure modutil to have the AES mechanism go to the Metaslot. After you disable PKCS#11 bypasss using Admin GUI/CLI,  check that server.xml should have <server> ....    <pkcs11>         <enabled>1</enabled>         <allow-bypass>0</allow-bypass>     </pkcs11> With PKCS#11 bypass enabled, Oracle iPlanet Web Server will only use the RSA capability of the T4, provided certificate and key are stored in the T4 slot (Metaslot). Actually, the RSA op is never bypassed in NSS, it's always done with PKCS#11 calls. So the bypass settings won't affect the behavior of the probes for RSA at all. The only thing that matters if where the RSA key and certificate live, ie. which PKCS#11 token, and thus which PKCS#11 module gets called to do the work. If your certificate/key are in the NSS certificate/key db, you will see libsoftokn3/libfreebl libraries doing the RSA work. If they are in the Sun Metaslot, it should be the Solaris code. 10. Start the server instance # ../bin/startserv Oracle iPlanet Web Server 7.0.16 B09/14/2012 03:33Please enter the PIN for the "Sun Metaslot" token: password...info: HTTP3072: http-listener-1: https://hostname.fqdn:80 ready to accept requestsinfo: CORE3274: successful server startup 11. Figure out which process to run this DTrace script on # ps -eaf | grep webservd | grep -v dogwebservd 18224 18223 0 13:17:25 ? 0:07 webservd -d /opt/oracle/webserver7/https-hostname.fqdn/config -r /opt/root 18225 18224 0 13:17:25 ? 0:00 webservd -d /opt/oracle/webserver7/https-hostname.fqdn/config -r /opt/ (For Oracle Traffic Director look for process named "trafficd") We see that the child process id is “18225” 12. Clients for testing : You can use any browser. I used NSS tool tstclnt for testing $cat > req.txtGET /index.html HTTP/1.0 For checking both RSA and AES, I used cipher “:0035” which is TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA $./tstclnt -h hostname -p 80 -d . -T -f -o -v -c “:0035” < req.txt 13. How do I make sure that crypto accelerator is being used 13.1 Create DTrace script The following D script should be able to uncover whether T4-specific crypto routine are being called or not. It also displays stats per second. # cat > t4crypto.d#!/usr/sbin/dtrace -spid$target::*rsa*:entry,pid$target::*yf*:entry{    @ops[probemod, probefunc] = count();}tick-1sec{    printa(@ops);    trunc(@ops);} Invoke with './t4crypto.d -p <pid> ' 13.2 EXPECTED PROBES FOR Solaris 10 : If offloading to T4 HW are correctly set up, the expected DTrace output would have these probes and libraries library Operations PROBES pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so RSA soft_decrypt_rsa_pkcs_decode, soft_encrypt_rsa_pkcs_encode soft_rsa_crypt_init_common soft_rsa_decrypt, soft_rsa_encrypt soft_rsa_decrypt_common, soft_rsa_encrypt_common AES yf_aes_instructions_present yf_aes_expand256, yf_aes256_cbc_decrypt, yf_aes256_cbc_encrypt, yf_aes256_load_keys_for_decrypt, yf_aes256_load_keys_for_encrypt, Note that these are for 256, same for 128, 192... these are for cbc, same for ecb, ctr, cfb128... DES yf_des_expand, yf_des_instructions_present yf_des_encrypt libmd_psr.so MD5 yf_md5_multiblock, yf_md5_instruction_present SHA1 yf_sha1_instruction_present, yf_sha1_multibloc 13.3 SAMPLE OUTPUT FOR CIPHER TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA (0x0035) ON T4 SPARC SOLARIS 10 WITHOUT PKCS#11 BYPASS # ./t4crypto.d -p 18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_decrypt_rsa_pkcs_decode    1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_crypt_init_common      1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_decrypt                1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   big_mp_mul_yf                   2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mpm_yf_mpmul                    2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mpmul_arr_yf                    2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   rijndael_key_setup_enc_yf       2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_decrypt_common         2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes_expand256                2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes256_cbc_decrypt           3 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes256_load_keys_for_decrypt 3 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   big_mont_mul_yf                 6 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mm_yf_montmul                   6 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_des_instructions_present     6 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes256_cbc_encrypt           8 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes256_load_keys_for_encrypt 8 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_mpmul_present                8 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_aes_instructions_present    13 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_des_encrypt                 18 libmd_psr.so.1                yf_md5_multiblock              41 libmd_psr.so.1                yf_md5_instruction_present     72 libmd_psr.so.1                yf_sha1_instruction_present    82 libmd_psr.so.1                yf_sha1_multiblock             82 This indicates that both RSA and AES ops are done in Solaris Crypto Framework. 13.4 SAMPLE OUTPUT FOR CIPHER TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA (0x0035) ON T4 SPARC SOLARIS 10 WITH PKCS#11 BYPASS # ./t4crypto.d -p 18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_decrypt_rsa_pkcs_decode 1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_crypt_init_common   1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_decrypt             1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   soft_rsa_decrypt_common      1 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   big_mp_mul_yf                2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mpm_yf_mpmul                 2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mpmul_arr_yf                 2 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   big_mont_mul_yf              6 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   mm_yf_montmul                6 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1   yf_mpmul_present             8 For this cipher, when I enable PKCS#11 bypass, Only RSA probes are being hit AES probes are not being hit. 13.5 ustack() for RSA operations / probefunc == "soft_rsa_decrypt" / Shows that libnss3.so is calling C_* functions of libpkcs11.so which is calling functions of pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so for both cases with and without bypass. When PKCS#11 bypass is disabled (allow-bypass is 0) pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_rsa_decrypt pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_rsa_decrypt_common+0x94 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_unwrapkey+0x258 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`C_UnwrapKey+0x1ec libpkcs11.so.1`meta_unwrap_key+0x17c libpkcs11.so.1`meta_UnwrapKey+0xc4 libpkcs11.so.1`C_UnwrapKey+0xfc libnss3.so`pk11_AnyUnwrapKey+0x6b8 libnss3.so`PK11_PubUnwrapSymKey+0x8c libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleRSAClientKeyExchange+0x1a0 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleClientKeyExchange+0x154 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshakeMessage+0x440 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshake+0x11c libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleRecord+0x5e8 libssl3.so`ssl3_GatherCompleteHandshake+0x5c libssl3.so`ssl_GatherRecord1stHandshake+0x30 libssl3.so`ssl_Do1stHandshake+0xec libssl3.so`ssl_SecureRecv+0x1c8 libssl3.so`ssl_Recv+0x9c libns-httpd40.so`__1cNDaemonSessionDrun6M_v_+0x2dc When PKCS#11 bypass is enabled (allow-bypass is 1) pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_rsa_decrypt pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_rsa_decrypt_common+0x94 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`C_Decrypt+0x164 libpkcs11.so.1`meta_do_operation+0x27c libpkcs11.so.1`meta_Decrypt+0x4c libpkcs11.so.1`C_Decrypt+0xcc libnss3.so`PK11_PrivDecryptPKCS1+0x1ac libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleRSAClientKeyExchange+0xe4 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleClientKeyExchange+0x154 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshakeMessage+0x440 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshake+0x11c libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleRecord+0x5e8 libssl3.so`ssl3_GatherCompleteHandshake+0x5c libssl3.so`ssl_GatherRecord1stHandshake+0x30 libssl3.so`ssl_Do1stHandshake+0xec libssl3.so`ssl_SecureRecv+0x1c8 libssl3.so`ssl_Recv+0x9c libns-httpd40.so`__1cNDaemonSessionDrun6M_v_+0x2dc libnsprwrap.so`ThreadMain+0x1c libnspr4.so`_pt_root+0xe8 13.6 ustack() FOR AES operations / probefunc == "yf_aes256_cbc_encrypt" / When PKCS#11 bypass is disabled (allow-bypass is 0) pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`yf_aes256_cbc_encrypt pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`aes_block_process_contiguous_whole_blocks+0xb4 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`aes_crypt_contiguous_blocks+0x1cc pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`soft_aes_encrypt_common+0x22c pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1`C_EncryptUpdate+0x10c libpkcs11.so.1`meta_do_operation+0x1fc libpkcs11.so.1`meta_EncryptUpdate+0x4c libpkcs11.so.1`C_EncryptUpdate+0xcc libnss3.so`PK11_CipherOp+0x1a0 libssl3.so`ssl3_CompressMACEncryptRecord+0x264 libssl3.so`ssl3_SendRecord+0x300 libssl3.so`ssl3_FlushHandshake+0x54 libssl3.so`ssl3_SendFinished+0x1fc libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleFinished+0x314 libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshakeMessage+0x4ac libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleHandshake+0x11c libssl3.so`ssl3_HandleRecord+0x5e8 libssl3.so`ssl3_GatherCompleteHandshake+0x5c libssl3.so`ssl_GatherRecord1stHandshake+0x30 libssl3.so`ssl_Do1stHandshake+0xec Shows that libnss3.so is calling C_* functions of libpkcs11.so which is calling functions of pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so However when PKCS#11 bypass is disabled (allow-bypass is 1) this stack isn't getting called. 14. LIST OF ALL THE PROBES MATCHED BY D SCRIPT FOR REFERENCE # ./t4crypto.d -p 18225 -l ID PROVIDER MODULE FUNCTION NAME ... 55720 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_md5_instruction_present entry 55721 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha256_instruction_present entry 55722 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha512_instruction_present entry 55723 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha1_instruction_present entry 55724 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha256 entry 55725 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha256_multiblock entry 55726 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha512 entry 55727 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha512_multiblock entry 55728 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha1 entry 55729 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_sha1_multiblock entry 55730 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_md5 entry 55731 pid18225 libmd_psr.so.1 yf_md5_multiblock entry 55732 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_instructions_present entry 55733 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 rijndael_key_setup_enc_yf entry 55734 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_expand128 entry 55735 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_encrypt128 entry 55736 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_decrypt128 entry 55737 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_expand192 entry 55738 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_encrypt192 entry 55739 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_decrypt192 entry 55740 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_expand256 entry 55741 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_encrypt256 entry 55742 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes_decrypt256 entry 55743 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_load_keys_for_encrypt entry 55744 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_load_keys_for_encrypt entry 55745 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_load_keys_for_encrypt entry 55746 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_ecb_encrypt entry 55747 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_ecb_encrypt entry 55748 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_ecb_encrypt entry 55749 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_cbc_encrypt entry 55750 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_cbc_encrypt entry 55751 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_cbc_encrypt entry 55752 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_ctr_crypt entry 55753 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_ctr_crypt entry 55754 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_ctr_crypt entry 55755 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_cfb128_encrypt entry 55756 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_cfb128_encrypt entry 55757 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_cfb128_encrypt entry 55758 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_load_keys_for_decrypt entry 55759 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_load_keys_for_decrypt entry 55760 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_load_keys_for_decrypt entry 55761 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_ecb_decrypt entry 55762 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_ecb_decrypt entry 55763 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_ecb_decrypt entry 55764 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_cbc_decrypt entry 55765 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_cbc_decrypt entry 55766 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_cbc_decrypt entry 55767 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes128_cfb128_decrypt entry 55768 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes192_cfb128_decrypt entry 55769 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_aes256_cfb128_decrypt entry 55771 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_des_instructions_present entry 55772 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_des_expand entry 55773 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_des_encrypt entry 55774 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_mpmul_present entry 55775 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 yf_montmul_present entry 55776 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mm_yf_montmul entry 55777 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mm_yf_montsqr entry 55778 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mm_yf_restore_func entry 55779 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mm_yf_ret_from_mont_func entry 55780 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mm_yf_execute_slp entry 55781 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 big_modexp_ncp_yf entry 55782 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 big_mont_mul_yf entry 55783 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mpmul_arr_yf entry 55784 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 big_mp_mul_yf entry 55785 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 mpm_yf_mpmul entry 55786 pid18225 libns-httpd40.so nsapi_rsa_set_priv_fn entry ... 55795 pid18225 libnss3.so prepare_rsa_priv_key_export_for_asn1 entry 55796 pid18225 libresolv.so.2 sunw_dst_rsaref_init entry 55797 pid18225 libnssutil3.so NSS_Get_SEC_UniversalStringTemplate entry ... 55813 pid18225 libsoftokn3.so prepare_low_rsa_priv_key_for_asn1 entry 55814 pid18225 libsoftokn3.so rsa_FormatOneBlock entry 55815 pid18225 libsoftokn3.so rsa_FormatBlock entry 55816 pid18225 libnssdbm3.so lg_prepare_low_rsa_priv_key_for_asn1 entry 55817 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_build_from_primes entry 55818 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_is_prime entry 55819 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_get_primes_from_exponents entry 55820 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_PrivateKeyOpNoCRT entry 55821 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_PrivateKeyOpCRTNoCheck entry 55822 pid18225 libfreebl_32fpu_3.so rsa_PrivateKeyOpCRTCheckedPubKey entry 55823 pid18225 pkcs11_kernel.so.1 key_gen_rsa_by_value entry 55824 pid18225 pkcs11_kernel.so.1 get_rsa_private_key entry 55825 pid18225 pkcs11_kernel.so.1 get_rsa_public_key entry 55826 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_encrypt entry 55827 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_decrypt entry 55828 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_crypt_init_common entry 55829 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_encrypt_common entry 55830 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_decrypt_common entry 55831 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_sign_verify_init_common entry 55832 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_sign_common entry 55833 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_verify_common entry 55834 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 generate_rsa_key entry 55835 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_genkey_pair entry 55836 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 get_rsa_sha1_prefix entry 55837 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_digest_sign_common entry 55838 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_digest_verify_common entry 55839 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_rsa_verify_recover entry 55840 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 rsa_pri_to_asn1 entry 55841 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 asn1_to_rsa_pri entry 55842 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_encrypt_rsa_pkcs_encode entry 55843 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_decrypt_rsa_pkcs_decode entry 55844 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_sign_rsa_pkcs_encode entry 55845 pid18225 pkcs11_softtoken_extra.so.1 soft_verify_rsa_pkcs_decode entry 55770 profile tick-1sec

    Read the article

  • ASP.NET MVC 2 Model Binding for a Collection

    - by nmarun
    Yes, my yet another post on Model Binding (previous one is here), but this one uses features presented in MVC 2. How I got to writing this blog? Well, I’m on a project where we’re doing some MVC things for a shopping cart. Let me show you what I was working with. Below are my model classes: 1: public class Product 2: { 3: public int Id { get; set; } 4: public string Name { get; set; } 5: public int Quantity { get; set; } 6: public decimal UnitPrice { get; set; } 7: } 8:   9: public class Totals 10: { 11: public decimal SubTotal { get; set; } 12: public decimal Tax { get; set; } 13: public decimal Total { get; set; } 14: } 15:   16: public class Basket 17: { 18: public List<Product> Products { get; set; } 19: public Totals Totals { get; set;} 20: } The view looks as below:  1: <h2>Shopping Cart</h2> 2:   3: <% using(Html.BeginForm()) { %> 4: 5: <h3>Products</h3> 6: <% for (int i = 0; i < Model.Products.Count; i++) 7: { %> 8: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Id</div> 9: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 10: <%= Html.TextBox("ID", Model.Products[i].Id) %> 11: </div> 12: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 13: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Name</div> 14: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 15: <%= Html.TextBox("Name", Model.Products[i].Name) %> 16: </div> 17: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 18: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Quantity</div> 19: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 20: <%= Html.TextBox("Quantity", Model.Products[i].Quantity)%> 21: </div> 22: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 23: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Unit Price</div> 24: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 25: <%= Html.TextBox("UnitPrice", Model.Products[i].UnitPrice)%> 26: </div> 27: <div style="clear:both;"><hr /></div> 28: <% } %> 29: 30: <h3>Totals</h3> 31: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Sub Total</div> 32: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 33: <%= Html.TextBox("SubTotal", Model.Totals.SubTotal)%> 34: </div> 35: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 36: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Tax</div> 37: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 38: <%= Html.TextBox("Tax", Model.Totals.Tax)%> 39: </div> 40: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 41: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;">Total</div> 42: <div style="width: 100px;float:left;"> 43: <%= Html.TextBox("Total", Model.Totals.Total)%> 44: </div> 45: <div style="clear:both;"></div> 46: <p /> 47: <input type="submit" name="Submit" value="Submit" /> 48: <% } %> .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Nothing fancy, just a bunch of div’s containing textboxes and a submit button. Just make note that the textboxes have the same name as the property they are going to display. Yea, yea, I know. I’m displaying unit price as a textbox instead of a label, but that’s beside the point (and trust me, this will not be how it’ll look on the production site!!). The way my controller works is that initially two dummy products are added to the basked object and the Totals are calculated based on what products were added in what quantities and their respective unit price. So when the page loads in edit mode, where the user can change the quantity and hit the submit button. In the ‘post’ version of the action method, the Totals get recalculated and the new total will be displayed on the screen. Here’s the code: 1: public ActionResult Index() 2: { 3: Product product1 = new Product 4: { 5: Id = 1, 6: Name = "Product 1", 7: Quantity = 2, 8: UnitPrice = 200m 9: }; 10:   11: Product product2 = new Product 12: { 13: Id = 2, 14: Name = "Product 2", 15: Quantity = 1, 16: UnitPrice = 150m 17: }; 18:   19: List<Product> products = new List<Product> { product1, product2 }; 20:   21: Basket basket = new Basket 22: { 23: Products = products, 24: Totals = ComputeTotals(products) 25: }; 26: return View(basket); 27: } 28:   29: [HttpPost] 30: public ActionResult Index(Basket basket) 31: { 32: basket.Totals = ComputeTotals(basket.Products); 33: return View(basket); 34: } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } That’s that. Now I run the app, I see two products with the totals section below them. I look at the view source and I see that the input controls have the right ID, the right name and the right value as well. 1: <input id="ID" name="ID" type="text" value="1" /> 2: <input id="Name" name="Name" type="text" value="Product 1" /> 3: ... 4: <input id="ID" name="ID" type="text" value="2" /> 5: <input id="Name" name="Name" type="text" value="Product 2" /> .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } So just as a regular user would do, I change the quantity value of one of the products and hit the submit button. The ‘post’ version of the Index method gets called and I had put a break-point on line 32 in the above snippet. When I hovered my mouse on the ‘basked’ object, happily assuming that the object would be all bound and ready for use, I was surprised to see both basket.Products and basket.Totals were null. Huh? A little research and I found out that the reason the DefaultModelBinder could not do its job is because of a naming mismatch on the input controls. What I mean is that when you have to bind to a custom .net type, you need more than just the property name. You need to pass a qualified name to the name property of the input control. I modified my view and the emitted code looked as below: 1: <input id="Product_Name" name="Product.Name" type="text" value="Product 1" /> 2: ... 3: <input id="Product_Name" name="Product.Name" type="text" value="Product 2" /> 4: ... 5: <input id="Totals_SubTotal" name="Totals.SubTotal" type="text" value="550" /> .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Now, I update the quantity and hit the submit button and I see that the Totals object is populated, but the Products list is still null. Once again I went: ‘Hmm.. time for more research’. I found out that the way to do this is to provide the name as: 1: <%= Html.TextBox(string.Format("Products[{0}].ID", i), Model.Products[i].Id) %> 2: <!-- this will be rendered as --> 3: <input id="Products_0__ID" name="Products[0].ID" type="text" value="1" /> .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } It was only now that I was able to see both the products and the totals being properly bound in the ‘post’ action method. Somehow, I feel this is kinda ‘clunky’ way of doing things. Seems like people at MS felt in a similar way and offered us a much cleaner way to solve this issue. The simple solution is that instead of using a Textbox, we can either use a TextboxFor or an EditorFor helper method. This one directly spits out the name of the input property as ‘Products[0].ID and so on. Cool right? I totally fell for this and changed my UI to contain EditorFor helper method. At this point, I ran the application, changed the quantity field and pressed the submit button. Of course my basket object parameter in my action method was correctly bound after these changes. I let the app complete the rest of the lines in the action method. When the page finally rendered, I did see that the quantity was changed to what I entered before the post. But, wait a minute, the totals section did not reflect the changes and showed the old values. My status: COMPLETELY PUZZLED! Just to recap, this is what my ‘post’ Index method looked like: 1: [HttpPost] 2: public ActionResult Index(Basket basket) 3: { 4: basket.Totals = ComputeTotals(basket.Products); 5: return View(basket); 6: } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } A careful debug confirmed that the basked.Products[0].Quantity showed the updated value and the ComputeTotals() method also returns the correct totals. But still when I passed this basket object, it ended up showing the old totals values only. I began playing a bit with the code and my first guess was that the input controls got their values from the ModelState object. For those who don’t know, the ModelState is a temporary storage area that ASP.NET MVC uses to retain incoming attempted values plus binding and validation errors. Also, the fact that input controls populate the values using data taken from: Previously attempted values recorded in the ModelState["name"].Value.AttemptedValue Explicitly provided value (<%= Html.TextBox("name", "Some value") %>) ViewData, by calling ViewData.Eval("name") FYI: ViewData dictionary takes precedence over ViewData's Model properties – read more here. These two indicators led to my guess. It took me quite some time, but finally I hit this post where Brad brilliantly explains why this is the preferred behavior. My guess was right and I, accordingly modified my code to reflect the following way: 1: [HttpPost] 2: public ActionResult Index(Basket basket) 3: { 4: // read the following posts to see why the ModelState 5: // needs to be cleared before passing it the view 6: // http://forums.asp.net/t/1535846.aspx 7: // http://forums.asp.net/p/1527149/3687407.aspx 8: if (ModelState.IsValid) 9: { 10: ModelState.Clear(); 11: } 12:   13: basket.Totals = ComputeTotals(basket.Products); 14: return View(basket); 15: } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } What this does is that in the case where your ModelState IS valid, it clears the dictionary. This enables the values to be read from the model directly and not from the ModelState. So the verdict is this: If you need to pass other parameters (like html attributes and the like) to your input control, use 1: <%= Html.TextBox(string.Format("Products[{0}].ID", i), Model.Products[i].Id) %> .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Since, in EditorFor, there is no direct and simple way of passing this information to the input control. If you don’t have to pass any such ‘extra’ piece of information to the control, then go the EditorFor way. The code used in the post can be found here.

    Read the article

  • Scaling-out Your Services by Message Bus based WCF Transport Extension &ndash; Part 1 &ndash; Background

    - by Shaun
    Cloud computing gives us more flexibility on the computing resource, we can provision and deploy an application or service with multiple instances over multiple machines. With the increment of the service instances, how to balance the incoming message and workload would become a new challenge. Currently there are two approaches we can use to pass the incoming messages to the service instances, I would like call them dispatcher mode and pulling mode.   Dispatcher Mode The dispatcher mode introduces a role which takes the responsible to find the best service instance to process the request. The image below describes the sharp of this mode. There are four clients communicate with the service through the underlying transportation. For example, if we are using HTTP the clients might be connecting to the same service URL. On the server side there’s a dispatcher listening on this URL and try to retrieve all messages. When a message came in, the dispatcher will find a proper service instance to process it. There are three mechanism to find the instance: Round-robin: Dispatcher will always send the message to the next instance. For example, if the dispatcher sent the message to instance 2, then the next message will be sent to instance 3, regardless if instance 3 is busy or not at that moment. Random: Dispatcher will find a service instance randomly, and same as the round-robin mode it regardless if the instance is busy or not. Sticky: Dispatcher will send all related messages to the same service instance. This approach always being used if the service methods are state-ful or session-ful. But as you can see, all of these approaches are not really load balanced. The clients will send messages at any time, and each message might take different process duration on the server side. This means in some cases, some of the service instances are very busy while others are almost idle. For example, if we were using round-robin mode, it could be happened that most of the simple task messages were passed to instance 1 while the complex ones were sent to instance 3, even though instance 1 should be idle. This brings some problem in our architecture. The first one is that, the response to the clients might be longer than it should be. As it’s shown in the figure above, message 6 and 9 can be processed by instance 1 or instance 2, but in reality they were dispatched to the busy instance 3 since the dispatcher and round-robin mode. Secondly, if there are many requests came from the clients in a very short period, service instances might be filled by tons of pending tasks and some instances might be crashed. Third, if we are using some cloud platform to host our service instances, for example the Windows Azure, the computing resource is billed by service deployment period instead of the actual CPU usage. This means if any service instance is idle it is wasting our money! Last one, the dispatcher would be the bottleneck of our system since all incoming messages must be routed by the dispatcher. If we are using HTTP or TCP as the transport, the dispatcher would be a network load balance. If we wants more capacity, we have to scale-up, or buy a hardware load balance which is very expensive, as well as scaling-out the service instances. Pulling Mode Pulling mode doesn’t need a dispatcher to route the messages. All service instances are listening to the same transport and try to retrieve the next proper message to process if they are idle. Since there is no dispatcher in pulling mode, it requires some features on the transportation. The transportation must support multiple client connection and server listening. HTTP and TCP doesn’t allow multiple clients are listening on the same address and port, so it cannot be used in pulling mode directly. All messages in the transportation must be FIFO, which means the old message must be received before the new one. Message selection would be a plus on the transportation. This means both service and client can specify some selection criteria and just receive some specified kinds of messages. This feature is not mandatory but would be very useful when implementing the request reply and duplex WCF channel modes. Otherwise we must have a memory dictionary to store the reply messages. I will explain more about this in the following articles. Message bus, or the message queue would be best candidate as the transportation when using the pulling mode. First, it allows multiple application to listen on the same queue, and it’s FIFO. Some of the message bus also support the message selection, such as TIBCO EMS, RabbitMQ. Some others provide in memory dictionary which can store the reply messages, for example the Redis. The principle of pulling mode is to let the service instances self-managed. This means each instance will try to retrieve the next pending incoming message if they finished the current task. This gives us more benefit and can solve the problems we met with in the dispatcher mode. The incoming message will be received to the best instance to process, which means this will be very balanced. And it will not happen that some instances are busy while other are idle, since the idle one will retrieve more tasks to make them busy. Since all instances are try their best to be busy we can use less instances than dispatcher mode, which more cost effective. Since there’s no dispatcher in the system, there is no bottleneck. When we introduced more service instances, in dispatcher mode we have to change something to let the dispatcher know the new instances. But in pulling mode since all service instance are self-managed, there no extra change at all. If there are many incoming messages, since the message bus can queue them in the transportation, service instances would not be crashed. All above are the benefits using the pulling mode, but it will introduce some problem as well. The process tracking and debugging become more difficult. Since the service instances are self-managed, we cannot know which instance will process the message. So we need more information to support debug and track. Real-time response may not be supported. All service instances will process the next message after the current one has done, if we have some real-time request this may not be a good solution. Compare with the Pros and Cons above, the pulling mode would a better solution for the distributed system architecture. Because what we need more is the scalability, cost-effect and the self-management.   WCF and WCF Transport Extensibility Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) is a framework for building service-oriented applications. In the .NET world WCF is the best way to implement the service. In this series I’m going to demonstrate how to implement the pulling mode on top of a message bus by extending the WCF. I don’t want to deep into every related field in WCF but will highlight its transport extensibility. When we implemented an RPC foundation there are many aspects we need to deal with, for example the message encoding, encryption, authentication and message sending and receiving. In WCF, each aspect is represented by a channel. A message will be passed through all necessary channels and finally send to the underlying transportation. And on the other side the message will be received from the transport and though the same channels until the business logic. This mode is called “Channel Stack” in WCF, and the last channel in the channel stack must always be a transport channel, which takes the responsible for sending and receiving the messages. As we are going to implement the WCF over message bus and implement the pulling mode scaling-out solution, we need to create our own transport channel so that the client and service can exchange messages over our bus. Before we deep into the transport channel, let’s have a look on the message exchange patterns that WCF defines. Message exchange pattern (MEP) defines how client and service exchange the messages over the transportation. WCF defines 3 basic MEPs which are datagram, Request-Reply and Duplex. Datagram: Also known as one-way, or fire-forgot mode. The message sent from the client to the service, and no need any reply from the service. The client doesn’t care about the message result at all. Request-Reply: Very common used pattern. The client send the request message to the service and wait until the reply message comes from the service. Duplex: The client sent message to the service, when the service processing the message it can callback to the client. When callback the service would be like a client while the client would be like a service. In WCF, each MEP represent some channels associated. MEP Channels Datagram IInputChannel, IOutputChannel Request-Reply IRequestChannel, IReplyChannel Duplex IDuplexChannel And the channels are created by ChannelListener on the server side, and ChannelFactory on the client side. The ChannelListener and ChannelFactory are created by the TransportBindingElement. The TransportBindingElement is created by the Binding, which can be defined as a new binding or from a custom binding. For more information about the transport channel mode, please refer to the MSDN document. The figure below shows the transport channel objects when using the request-reply MEP. And this is the datagram MEP. And this is the duplex MEP. After investigated the WCF transport architecture, channel mode and MEP, we finally identified what we should do to extend our message bus based transport layer. They are: Binding: (Optional) Defines the channel elements in the channel stack and added our transport binding element at the bottom of the stack. But we can use the build-in CustomBinding as well. TransportBindingElement: Defines which MEP is supported in our transport and create the related ChannelListener and ChannelFactory. This also defines the scheme of the endpoint if using this transport. ChannelListener: Create the server side channel based on the MEP it’s. We can have one ChannelListener to create channels for all supported MEPs, or we can have ChannelListener for each MEP. In this series I will use the second approach. ChannelFactory: Create the client side channel based on the MEP it’s. We can have one ChannelFactory to create channels for all supported MEPs, or we can have ChannelFactory for each MEP. In this series I will use the second approach. Channels: Based on the MEPs we want to support, we need to implement the channels accordingly. For example, if we want our transport support Request-Reply mode we should implement IRequestChannel and IReplyChannel. In this series I will implement all 3 MEPs listed above one by one. Scaffold: In order to make our transport extension works we also need to implement some scaffold stuff. For example we need some classes to send and receive message though out message bus. We also need some codes to read and write the WCF message, etc.. These are not necessary but would be very useful in our example.   Message Bus There is only one thing remained before we can begin to implement our scaling-out support WCF transport, which is the message bus. As I mentioned above, the message bus must have some features to fulfill all the WCF MEPs. In my company we will be using TIBCO EMS, which is an enterprise message bus product. And I have said before we can use any message bus production if it’s satisfied with our requests. Here I would like to introduce an interface to separate the message bus from the WCF. This allows us to implement the bus operations by any kinds bus we are going to use. The interface would be like this. 1: public interface IBus : IDisposable 2: { 3: string SendRequest(string message, bool fromClient, string from, string to = null); 4:  5: void SendReply(string message, bool fromClient, string replyTo); 6:  7: BusMessage Receive(bool fromClient, string replyTo); 8: } There are only three methods for the bus interface. Let me explain one by one. The SendRequest method takes the responsible for sending the request message into the bus. The parameters description are: message: The WCF message content. fromClient: Indicates if this message was came from the client. from: The channel ID that this message was sent from. The channel ID will be generated when any kinds of channel was created, which will be explained in the following articles. to: The channel ID that this message should be received. In Request-Reply and Duplex MEP this is necessary since the reply message must be received by the channel which sent the related request message. The SendReply method takes the responsible for sending the reply message. It’s very similar as the previous one but no “from” parameter. This is because it’s no need to reply a reply message again in any MEPs. The Receive method takes the responsible for waiting for a incoming message, includes the request message and specified reply message. It returned a BusMessage object, which contains some information about the channel information. The code of the BusMessage class is 1: public class BusMessage 2: { 3: public string MessageID { get; private set; } 4: public string From { get; private set; } 5: public string ReplyTo { get; private set; } 6: public string Content { get; private set; } 7:  8: public BusMessage(string messageId, string fromChannelId, string replyToChannelId, string content) 9: { 10: MessageID = messageId; 11: From = fromChannelId; 12: ReplyTo = replyToChannelId; 13: Content = content; 14: } 15: } Now let’s implement a message bus based on the IBus interface. Since I don’t want you to buy and install the TIBCO EMS or any other message bus products, I will implement an in process memory bus. This bus is only for test and sample purpose. It can only be used if the service and client are in the same process. Very straightforward. 1: public class InProcMessageBus : IBus 2: { 3: private readonly ConcurrentDictionary<Guid, InProcMessageEntity> _queue; 4: private readonly object _lock; 5:  6: public InProcMessageBus() 7: { 8: _queue = new ConcurrentDictionary<Guid, InProcMessageEntity>(); 9: _lock = new object(); 10: } 11:  12: public string SendRequest(string message, bool fromClient, string from, string to = null) 13: { 14: var entity = new InProcMessageEntity(message, fromClient, from, to); 15: _queue.TryAdd(entity.ID, entity); 16: return entity.ID.ToString(); 17: } 18:  19: public void SendReply(string message, bool fromClient, string replyTo) 20: { 21: var entity = new InProcMessageEntity(message, fromClient, null, replyTo); 22: _queue.TryAdd(entity.ID, entity); 23: } 24:  25: public BusMessage Receive(bool fromClient, string replyTo) 26: { 27: InProcMessageEntity e = null; 28: while (true) 29: { 30: lock (_lock) 31: { 32: var entity = _queue 33: .Where(kvp => kvp.Value.FromClient == fromClient && (kvp.Value.To == replyTo || string.IsNullOrWhiteSpace(kvp.Value.To))) 34: .FirstOrDefault(); 35: if (entity.Key != Guid.Empty && entity.Value != null) 36: { 37: _queue.TryRemove(entity.Key, out e); 38: } 39: } 40: if (e == null) 41: { 42: Thread.Sleep(100); 43: } 44: else 45: { 46: return new BusMessage(e.ID.ToString(), e.From, e.To, e.Content); 47: } 48: } 49: } 50:  51: public void Dispose() 52: { 53: } 54: } The InProcMessageBus stores the messages in the objects of InProcMessageEntity, which can take some extra information beside the WCF message itself. 1: public class InProcMessageEntity 2: { 3: public Guid ID { get; set; } 4: public string Content { get; set; } 5: public bool FromClient { get; set; } 6: public string From { get; set; } 7: public string To { get; set; } 8:  9: public InProcMessageEntity() 10: : this(string.Empty, false, string.Empty, string.Empty) 11: { 12: } 13:  14: public InProcMessageEntity(string content, bool fromClient, string from, string to) 15: { 16: ID = Guid.NewGuid(); 17: Content = content; 18: FromClient = fromClient; 19: From = from; 20: To = to; 21: } 22: }   Summary OK, now I have all necessary stuff ready. The next step would be implementing our WCF message bus transport extension. In this post I described two scaling-out approaches on the service side especially if we are using the cloud platform: dispatcher mode and pulling mode. And I compared the Pros and Cons of them. Then I introduced the WCF channel stack, channel mode and the transport extension part, and identified what we should do to create our own WCF transport extension, to let our WCF services using pulling mode based on a message bus. And finally I provided some classes that need to be used in the future posts that working against an in process memory message bus, for the demonstration purpose only. In the next post I will begin to implement the transport extension step by step.   Hope this helps, Shaun All documents and related graphics, codes are provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind. Copyright © Shaun Ziyan Xu. This work is licensed under the Creative Commons License.

    Read the article

  • Internet doesn't work by default

    - by Adam Martinez
    After upgrading to Precise, I am required to run 'sudo dhclient eth0' in a terminal in order to get the internet to work. Everything worked perfectly fine on Oneiric, so It's really puzzling me. I'm thinking it could possibly be something with the kernel, but who knows. Output of dmesg: [ 0.247891] system 00:01: [io 0x0290-0x030f] has been reserved [ 0.247896] system 00:01: [io 0x0290-0x0297] has been reserved [ 0.247901] system 00:01: [io 0x0880-0x088f] has been reserved [ 0.247908] system 00:01: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0c02 (active) [ 0.247931] pnp 00:02: [dma 4] [ 0.247935] pnp 00:02: [io 0x0000-0x000f] [ 0.247939] pnp 00:02: [io 0x0080-0x0090] [ 0.247943] pnp 00:02: [io 0x0094-0x009f] [ 0.247947] pnp 00:02: [io 0x00c0-0x00df] [ 0.248033] pnp 00:02: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0200 (active) [ 0.248125] pnp 00:03: [io 0x0070-0x0073] [ 0.248187] pnp 00:03: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0b00 (active) [ 0.248205] pnp 00:04: [io 0x0061] [ 0.248260] pnp 00:04: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0800 (active) [ 0.248277] pnp 00:05: [io 0x00f0-0x00ff] [ 0.248292] pnp 00:05: [irq 13] [ 0.248348] pnp 00:05: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0c04 (active) [ 0.248583] pnp 00:06: [io 0x03f0-0x03f5] [ 0.248588] pnp 00:06: [io 0x03f7] [ 0.248597] pnp 00:06: [irq 6] [ 0.248601] pnp 00:06: [dma 2] [ 0.248690] pnp 00:06: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0700 (active) [ 0.248998] pnp 00:07: [io 0x03f8-0x03ff] [ 0.249008] pnp 00:07: [irq 4] [ 0.249122] pnp 00:07: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0501 (active) [ 0.249479] pnp 00:08: [io 0x0400-0x04bf] [ 0.249584] system 00:08: [io 0x0400-0x04bf] has been reserved [ 0.249591] system 00:08: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0c02 (active) [ 0.249628] pnp 00:09: [mem 0xffb80000-0xffbfffff] [ 0.249690] pnp 00:09: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs INT0800 (active) [ 0.250049] pnp 00:0a: [mem 0xe0000000-0xefffffff] [ 0.250167] system 00:0a: [mem 0xe0000000-0xefffffff] has been reserved [ 0.250173] system 00:0a: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0c02 (active) [ 0.250302] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x000f0000-0x000fffff] [ 0.250307] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x7ff00000-0x7fffffff] [ 0.250311] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfed00000-0xfed000ff] [ 0.250316] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x0000046e-0x0000056d] [ 0.250320] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x7fee0000-0x7fefffff] [ 0.250324] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x00000000-0x0009ffff] [ 0.250328] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x00100000-0x7fedffff] [ 0.250332] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfec00000-0xfec00fff] [ 0.250336] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfed14000-0xfed1dfff] [ 0.250341] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfed20000-0xfed9ffff] [ 0.250345] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfee00000-0xfee00fff] [ 0.250349] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xffb00000-0xffb7ffff] [ 0.250353] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0xfff00000-0xffffffff] [ 0.250357] pnp 00:0b: [mem 0x000e0000-0x000effff] [ 0.250409] pnp 00:0b: disabling [mem 0x0000046e-0x0000056d] because it overlaps 0000:01:00.0 BAR 6 [mem 0x00000000-0x0007ffff pref] [ 0.250419] pnp 00:0b: disabling [mem 0x0000046e-0x0000056d disabled] because it overlaps 0000:03:00.0 BAR 6 [mem 0x00000000-0x0000ffff pref] [ 0.250430] pnp 00:0b: disabling [mem 0x0000046e-0x0000056d disabled] because it overlaps 0000:04:00.0 BAR 6 [mem 0x00000000-0x0001ffff pref] [ 0.250524] system 00:0b: [mem 0x000f0000-0x000fffff] could not be reserved [ 0.250530] system 00:0b: [mem 0x7ff00000-0x7fffffff] has been reserved [ 0.250536] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfed00000-0xfed000ff] has been reserved [ 0.250541] system 00:0b: [mem 0x7fee0000-0x7fefffff] could not be reserved [ 0.250547] system 00:0b: [mem 0x00000000-0x0009ffff] could not be reserved [ 0.250552] system 00:0b: [mem 0x00100000-0x7fedffff] could not be reserved [ 0.250558] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfec00000-0xfec00fff] could not be reserved [ 0.250563] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfed14000-0xfed1dfff] has been reserved [ 0.250568] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfed20000-0xfed9ffff] has been reserved [ 0.250574] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfee00000-0xfee00fff] has been reserved [ 0.250579] system 00:0b: [mem 0xffb00000-0xffb7ffff] has been reserved [ 0.250585] system 00:0b: [mem 0xfff00000-0xffffffff] has been reserved [ 0.250590] system 00:0b: [mem 0x000e0000-0x000effff] has been reserved [ 0.250596] system 00:0b: Plug and Play ACPI device, IDs PNP0c01 (active) [ 0.250614] pnp: PnP ACPI: found 12 devices [ 0.250617] ACPI: ACPI bus type pnp unregistered [ 0.250624] PnPBIOS: Disabled by ACPI PNP [ 0.288725] PCI: max bus depth: 1 pci_try_num: 2 [ 0.288786] pci 0000:01:00.0: BAR 6: assigned [mem 0xfb000000-0xfb07ffff pref] [ 0.288792] pci 0000:00:01.0: PCI bridge to [bus 01-01] [ 0.288797] pci 0000:00:01.0: bridge window [io 0xa000-0xafff] [ 0.288804] pci 0000:00:01.0: bridge window [mem 0xf8000000-0xfbffffff] [ 0.288811] pci 0000:00:01.0: bridge window [mem 0xd0000000-0xdfffffff 64bit pref] [ 0.288820] pci 0000:00:1c.0: PCI bridge to [bus 02-02] [ 0.288825] pci 0000:00:1c.0: bridge window [io 0x9000-0x9fff] [ 0.288833] pci 0000:00:1c.0: bridge window [mem 0xfdb00000-0xfdbfffff] [ 0.288840] pci 0000:00:1c.0: bridge window [mem 0xfd800000-0xfd8fffff 64bit pref] [ 0.288851] pci 0000:03:00.0: BAR 6: assigned [mem 0xfde00000-0xfde0ffff pref] [ 0.288856] pci 0000:00:1c.4: PCI bridge to [bus 03-03] [ 0.288861] pci 0000:00:1c.4: bridge window [io 0xd000-0xdfff] [ 0.288869] pci 0000:00:1c.4: bridge window [mem 0xfd700000-0xfd7fffff] [ 0.288876] pci 0000:00:1c.4: bridge window [mem 0xfde00000-0xfdefffff 64bit pref] [ 0.288887] pci 0000:04:00.0: BAR 6: assigned [mem 0xfdc00000-0xfdc1ffff pref] [ 0.288891] pci 0000:00:1c.5: PCI bridge to [bus 04-04] [ 0.288897] pci 0000:00:1c.5: bridge window [io 0xb000-0xbfff] [ 0.288904] pci 0000:00:1c.5: bridge window [mem 0xfdd00000-0xfddfffff] [ 0.288911] pci 0000:00:1c.5: bridge window [mem 0xfdc00000-0xfdcfffff 64bit pref] [ 0.288920] pci 0000:00:1e.0: PCI bridge to [bus 05-05] [ 0.288926] pci 0000:00:1e.0: bridge window [io 0xc000-0xcfff] [ 0.288933] pci 0000:00:1e.0: bridge window [mem 0xfda00000-0xfdafffff] [ 0.288940] pci 0000:00:1e.0: bridge window [mem 0xfd900000-0xfd9fffff 64bit pref] [ 0.288971] pci 0000:00:01.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.288979] pci 0000:00:01.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.288991] pci 0000:00:1c.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.288998] pci 0000:00:1c.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.289008] pci 0000:00:1c.4: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.289014] pci 0000:00:1c.4: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.289030] pci 0000:00:1c.5: PCI INT B -> GSI 17 (level, low) -> IRQ 17 [ 0.289037] pci 0000:00:1c.5: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.289047] pci 0000:00:1e.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.289054] pci_bus 0000:00: resource 4 [io 0x0000-0x0cf7] [ 0.289058] pci_bus 0000:00: resource 5 [io 0x0d00-0xffff] [ 0.289063] pci_bus 0000:00: resource 6 [mem 0x000a0000-0x000bffff] [ 0.289067] pci_bus 0000:00: resource 7 [mem 0x000c0000-0x000dffff] [ 0.289072] pci_bus 0000:00: resource 8 [mem 0x7ff00000-0xfebfffff] [ 0.289077] pci_bus 0000:01: resource 0 [io 0xa000-0xafff] [ 0.289081] pci_bus 0000:01: resource 1 [mem 0xf8000000-0xfbffffff] [ 0.289086] pci_bus 0000:01: resource 2 [mem 0xd0000000-0xdfffffff 64bit pref] [ 0.289092] pci_bus 0000:02: resource 0 [io 0x9000-0x9fff] [ 0.289096] pci_bus 0000:02: resource 1 [mem 0xfdb00000-0xfdbfffff] [ 0.289101] pci_bus 0000:02: resource 2 [mem 0xfd800000-0xfd8fffff 64bit pref] [ 0.289106] pci_bus 0000:03: resource 0 [io 0xd000-0xdfff] [ 0.289110] pci_bus 0000:03: resource 1 [mem 0xfd700000-0xfd7fffff] [ 0.289115] pci_bus 0000:03: resource 2 [mem 0xfde00000-0xfdefffff 64bit pref] [ 0.289120] pci_bus 0000:04: resource 0 [io 0xb000-0xbfff] [ 0.289124] pci_bus 0000:04: resource 1 [mem 0xfdd00000-0xfddfffff] [ 0.289129] pci_bus 0000:04: resource 2 [mem 0xfdc00000-0xfdcfffff 64bit pref] [ 0.289134] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 0 [io 0xc000-0xcfff] [ 0.289138] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 1 [mem 0xfda00000-0xfdafffff] [ 0.289143] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 2 [mem 0xfd900000-0xfd9fffff 64bit pref] [ 0.289148] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 4 [io 0x0000-0x0cf7] [ 0.289152] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 5 [io 0x0d00-0xffff] [ 0.289157] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 6 [mem 0x000a0000-0x000bffff] [ 0.289161] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 7 [mem 0x000c0000-0x000dffff] [ 0.289166] pci_bus 0000:05: resource 8 [mem 0x7ff00000-0xfebfffff] [ 0.289233] NET: Registered protocol family 2 [ 0.289360] IP route cache hash table entries: 32768 (order: 5, 131072 bytes) [ 0.289754] TCP established hash table entries: 131072 (order: 8, 1048576 bytes) [ 0.290351] TCP bind hash table entries: 65536 (order: 7, 524288 bytes) [ 0.290670] TCP: Hash tables configured (established 131072 bind 65536) [ 0.290674] TCP reno registered [ 0.290680] UDP hash table entries: 512 (order: 2, 16384 bytes) [ 0.290703] UDP-Lite hash table entries: 512 (order: 2, 16384 bytes) [ 0.290868] NET: Registered protocol family 1 [ 0.290911] pci 0000:00:1a.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.290932] pci 0000:00:1a.0: PCI INT A disabled [ 0.290956] pci 0000:00:1a.1: PCI INT B -> GSI 21 (level, low) -> IRQ 21 [ 0.290975] pci 0000:00:1a.1: PCI INT B disabled [ 0.290992] pci 0000:00:1a.2: PCI INT D -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.291012] pci 0000:00:1a.2: PCI INT D disabled [ 0.291031] pci 0000:00:1a.7: PCI INT C -> GSI 18 (level, low) -> IRQ 18 [ 0.291068] pci 0000:00:1a.7: PCI INT C disabled [ 0.291104] pci 0000:00:1d.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 23 (level, low) -> IRQ 23 [ 0.291123] pci 0000:00:1d.0: PCI INT A disabled [ 0.291135] pci 0000:00:1d.1: PCI INT B -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.291155] pci 0000:00:1d.1: PCI INT B disabled [ 0.291166] pci 0000:00:1d.2: PCI INT C -> GSI 18 (level, low) -> IRQ 18 [ 0.291185] pci 0000:00:1d.2: PCI INT C disabled [ 0.291198] pci 0000:00:1d.7: PCI INT A -> GSI 23 (level, low) -> IRQ 23 [ 0.291219] pci 0000:00:1d.7: PCI INT A disabled [ 0.291258] pci 0000:01:00.0: Boot video device [ 0.291273] PCI: CLS 4 bytes, default 64 [ 0.291857] audit: initializing netlink socket (disabled) [ 0.291876] type=2000 audit(1336753420.284:1): initialized [ 0.337724] highmem bounce pool size: 64 pages [ 0.337734] HugeTLB registered 2 MB page size, pre-allocated 0 pages [ 0.349241] VFS: Disk quotas dquot_6.5.2 [ 0.349365] Dquot-cache hash table entries: 1024 (order 0, 4096 bytes) [ 0.350418] fuse init (API version 7.17) [ 0.350611] msgmni has been set to 1685 [ 0.351179] Block layer SCSI generic (bsg) driver version 0.4 loaded (major 253) [ 0.351229] io scheduler noop registered [ 0.351233] io scheduler deadline registered [ 0.351247] io scheduler cfq registered (default) [ 0.351450] pcieport 0000:00:01.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.351502] pcieport 0000:00:01.0: irq 40 for MSI/MSI-X [ 0.351585] pcieport 0000:00:1c.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.351639] pcieport 0000:00:1c.0: irq 41 for MSI/MSI-X [ 0.351728] pcieport 0000:00:1c.4: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.351779] pcieport 0000:00:1c.4: irq 42 for MSI/MSI-X [ 0.351875] pcieport 0000:00:1c.5: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.351927] pcieport 0000:00:1c.5: irq 43 for MSI/MSI-X [ 0.352094] pci_hotplug: PCI Hot Plug PCI Core version: 0.5 [ 0.352143] pciehp: PCI Express Hot Plug Controller Driver version: 0.4 [ 0.352311] intel_idle: MWAIT substates: 0x22220 [ 0.352315] intel_idle: does not run on family 6 model 23 [ 0.352446] input: Power Button as /devices/LNXSYSTM:00/device:00/PNP0C0C:00/input/input0 [ 0.352455] ACPI: Power Button [PWRB] [ 0.352556] input: Power Button as /devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXPWRBN:00/input/input1 [ 0.352562] ACPI: Power Button [PWRF] [ 0.352650] ACPI: Fan [FAN] (on) [ 0.355667] thermal LNXTHERM:00: registered as thermal_zone0 [ 0.355673] ACPI: Thermal Zone [THRM] (26 C) [ 0.355750] ERST: Table is not found! [ 0.355753] GHES: HEST is not enabled! [ 0.355898] Serial: 8250/16550 driver, 32 ports, IRQ sharing enabled [ 0.376332] serial8250: ttyS0 at I/O 0x3f8 (irq = 4) is a 16550A [ 0.376582] isapnp: Scanning for PnP cards... [ 0.709133] Freeing initrd memory: 13792k freed [ 0.729743] isapnp: No Plug & Play device found [ 0.816786] 00:07: ttyS0 at I/O 0x3f8 (irq = 4) is a 16550A [ 0.832385] Linux agpgart interface v0.103 [ 0.835605] brd: module loaded [ 0.837138] loop: module loaded [ 0.837452] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.2: version 2.13 [ 0.837473] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.2: PCI INT A -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.837480] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.2: MAP [ P0 P2 P1 P3 ] [ 0.837546] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.2: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.838099] scsi0 : ata_piix [ 0.838253] scsi1 : ata_piix [ 0.839183] ata1: SATA max UDMA/133 cmd 0xf900 ctl 0xf800 bmdma 0xf500 irq 19 [ 0.839192] ata2: SATA max UDMA/133 cmd 0xf700 ctl 0xf600 bmdma 0xf508 irq 19 [ 0.839239] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.5: PCI INT A -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.839246] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.5: MAP [ P0 -- P1 -- ] [ 0.839300] ata_piix 0000:00:1f.5: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.839708] scsi2 : ata_piix [ 0.839841] scsi3 : ata_piix [ 0.840301] ata3: SATA max UDMA/133 cmd 0xf200 ctl 0xf100 bmdma 0xee00 irq 19 [ 0.840308] ata4: SATA max UDMA/133 cmd 0xf000 ctl 0xef00 bmdma 0xee08 irq 19 [ 0.840429] pata_acpi 0000:03:00.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.840467] pata_acpi 0000:03:00.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.840488] pata_acpi 0000:03:00.0: PCI INT A disabled [ 0.841159] Fixed MDIO Bus: probed [ 0.841205] tun: Universal TUN/TAP device driver, 1.6 [ 0.841210] tun: (C) 1999-2004 Max Krasnyansky <[email protected]> [ 0.841322] PPP generic driver version 2.4.2 [ 0.841515] ehci_hcd: USB 2.0 'Enhanced' Host Controller (EHCI) Driver [ 0.841542] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: PCI INT C -> GSI 18 (level, low) -> IRQ 18 [ 0.841567] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.841573] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: EHCI Host Controller [ 0.841658] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 1 [ 0.845582] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: cache line size of 4 is not supported [ 0.845610] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: irq 18, io mem 0xfdfff000 [ 0.860022] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1a.7: USB 2.0 started, EHCI 1.00 [ 0.860264] hub 1-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.860272] hub 1-0:1.0: 6 ports detected [ 0.860404] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: PCI INT A -> GSI 23 (level, low) -> IRQ 23 [ 0.860424] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.860430] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: EHCI Host Controller [ 0.860512] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 2 [ 0.864413] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: cache line size of 4 is not supported [ 0.864438] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: irq 23, io mem 0xfdffe000 [ 0.880021] ehci_hcd 0000:00:1d.7: USB 2.0 started, EHCI 1.00 [ 0.880227] hub 2-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.880234] hub 2-0:1.0: 6 ports detected [ 0.880369] ohci_hcd: USB 1.1 'Open' Host Controller (OHCI) Driver [ 0.880396] uhci_hcd: USB Universal Host Controller Interface driver [ 0.880431] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 0.880443] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.880449] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.0: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.880529] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.0: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 3 [ 0.880574] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.0: irq 16, io base 0x0000ff00 [ 0.880803] hub 3-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.880811] hub 3-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.880929] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.1: PCI INT B -> GSI 21 (level, low) -> IRQ 21 [ 0.880940] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.1: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.880946] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.1: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.881039] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.1: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 4 [ 0.881081] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.1: irq 21, io base 0x0000fe00 [ 0.881302] hub 4-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.881310] hub 4-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.881427] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.2: PCI INT D -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.881438] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.2: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.881443] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.2: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.881523] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.2: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 5 [ 0.881551] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1a.2: irq 19, io base 0x0000fd00 [ 0.881774] hub 5-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.881781] hub 5-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.881899] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 23 (level, low) -> IRQ 23 [ 0.881910] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.881915] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.0: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.881993] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.0: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 6 [ 0.882021] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.0: irq 23, io base 0x0000fc00 [ 0.882244] hub 6-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.882252] hub 6-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.882370] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.1: PCI INT B -> GSI 19 (level, low) -> IRQ 19 [ 0.882381] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.1: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.882386] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.1: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.882467] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.1: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 7 [ 0.882495] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.1: irq 19, io base 0x0000fb00 [ 0.882735] hub 7-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.882742] hub 7-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.882858] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.2: PCI INT C -> GSI 18 (level, low) -> IRQ 18 [ 0.882869] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.2: setting latency timer to 64 [ 0.882875] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.2: UHCI Host Controller [ 0.882954] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.2: new USB bus registered, assigned bus number 8 [ 0.882982] uhci_hcd 0000:00:1d.2: irq 18, io base 0x0000fa00 [ 0.883205] hub 8-0:1.0: USB hub found [ 0.883213] hub 8-0:1.0: 2 ports detected [ 0.883435] usbcore: registered new interface driver libusual [ 0.883535] i8042: PNP: No PS/2 controller found. Probing ports directly. [ 0.883926] serio: i8042 KBD port at 0x60,0x64 irq 1 [ 0.883936] serio: i8042 AUX port at 0x60,0x64 irq 12 [ 0.884187] mousedev: PS/2 mouse device common for all mice [ 0.884433] rtc_cmos 00:03: RTC can wake from S4 [ 0.884582] rtc_cmos 00:03: rtc core: registered rtc_cmos as rtc0 [ 0.884612] rtc0: alarms up to one month, 242 bytes nvram, hpet irqs [ 0.884719] device-mapper: uevent: version 1.0.3 [ 0.884854] device-mapper: ioctl: 4.22.0-ioctl (2011-10-19) initialised: [email protected] [ 0.884917] EISA: Probing bus 0 at eisa.0 [ 0.884921] EISA: Cannot allocate resource for mainboard [ 0.884925] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 1 [ 0.884929] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 2 [ 0.884932] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 3 [ 0.884936] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 4 [ 0.884940] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 5 [ 0.884943] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 6 [ 0.884947] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 7 [ 0.884950] Cannot allocate resource for EISA slot 8 [ 0.884954] EISA: Detected 0 cards. [ 0.884969] cpufreq-nforce2: No nForce2 chipset. [ 0.884973] cpuidle: using governor ladder [ 0.884976] cpuidle: using governor menu [ 0.884980] EFI Variables Facility v0.08 2004-May-17 [ 0.885476] TCP cubic registered [ 0.885708] NET: Registered protocol family 10 [ 0.886771] NET: Registered protocol family 17 [ 0.886799] Registering the dns_resolver key type [ 0.886837] Using IPI No-Shortcut mode [ 0.887028] PM: Hibernation image not present or could not be loaded. [ 0.887047] registered taskstats version 1 [ 0.902579] Magic number: 12:339:388 [ 0.902592] usb usb6: hash matches [ 0.902687] rtc_cmos 00:03: setting system clock to 2012-05-11 16:23:41 UTC (1336753421) [ 0.903185] BIOS EDD facility v0.16 2004-Jun-25, 0 devices found [ 0.903189] EDD information not available. [ 1.170710] ata3: SATA link down (SStatus 0 SControl 300) [ 1.181439] ata4: SATA link down (SStatus 0 SControl 300) [ 1.288020] Refined TSC clocksource calibration: 2499.999 MHz. [ 1.288028] Switching to clocksource tsc [ 1.292016] usb 1-5: new high-speed USB device number 3 using ehci_hcd [ 1.486745] ata2.00: SATA link down (SStatus 0 SControl 300) [ 1.486762] ata2.01: SATA link down (SStatus 0 SControl 300) [ 1.640115] ata1.00: SATA link up 1.5 Gbps (SStatus 113 SControl 300) [ 1.640130] ata1.01: SATA link down (SStatus 0 SControl 300) [ 1.648342] ata1.00: ATA-7: Maxtor 7Y250M0, YAR511W0, max UDMA/133 [ 1.648348] ata1.00: 490234752 sectors, multi 0: LBA48 [ 1.664325] ata1.00: configured for UDMA/133 [ 1.664531] scsi 0:0:0:0: Direct-Access ATA Maxtor 7Y250M0 YAR5 PQ: 0 ANSI: 5 [ 1.664745] sd 0:0:0:0: [sda] 490234752 512-byte logical blocks: (251 GB/233 GiB) [ 1.664809] sd 0:0:0:0: Attached scsi generic sg0 type 0 [ 1.664838] sd 0:0:0:0: [sda] Write Protect is off [ 1.664843] sd 0:0:0:0: [sda] Mode Sense: 00 3a 00 00 [ 1.664884] sd 0:0:0:0: [sda] Write cache: enabled, read cache: enabled, doesn't support DPO or FUA [ 1.691699] sda: sda1 sda2 sda3 sda4 [ 1.692348] sd 0:0:0:0: [sda] Attached SCSI disk [ 1.692461] Freeing unused kernel memory: 740k freed [ 1.692820] Write protecting the kernel text: 5828k [ 1.692851] Write protecting the kernel read-only data: 2376k [ 1.692854] NX-protecting the kernel data: 4412k [ 1.723980] udevd[92]: starting version 175 [ 1.865339] Floppy drive(s): fd0 is 1.44M [ 1.865429] pata_jmicron 0000:03:00.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 1.865478] pata_jmicron 0000:03:00.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 1.867875] sky2: driver version 1.30 [ 1.867926] sky2 0000:04:00.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 17 (level, low) -> IRQ 17 [ 1.867942] sky2 0000:04:00.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 1.867979] sky2 0000:04:00.0: Yukon-2 EC chip revision 2 [ 1.868111] sky2 0000:04:00.0: irq 44 for MSI/MSI-X [ 1.868174] scsi4 : pata_jmicron [ 1.869802] sky2 0000:04:00.0: eth0: addr 00:01:29:a4:16:0a [ 1.869828] scsi5 : pata_jmicron [ 1.869943] ata5: PATA max UDMA/100 cmd 0xdf00 ctl 0xde00 bmdma 0xdb00 irq 16 [ 1.869949] ata6: PATA max UDMA/100 cmd 0xdd00 ctl 0xdc00 bmdma 0xdb08 irq 16 [ 1.880053] usb 4-1: new full-speed USB device number 2 using uhci_hcd [ 1.884052] FDC 0 is a post-1991 82077 [ 2.032611] ata5.00: ATAPI: _NEC DVD+/-RW ND-3450A, 103C, max UDMA/33 [ 2.048585] ata5.00: configured for UDMA/33 [ 2.049777] scsi 4:0:0:0: CD-ROM _NEC DVD+-RW ND-3450A 103C PQ: 0 ANSI: 5 [ 2.051048] sr0: scsi3-mmc drive: 48x/48x writer cd/rw xa/form2 cdda tray [ 2.051054] cdrom: Uniform CD-ROM driver Revision: 3.20 [ 2.051283] sr 4:0:0:0: Attached scsi CD-ROM sr0 [ 2.051483] sr 4:0:0:0: Attached scsi generic sg1 type 5 [ 2.079838] usbcore: registered new interface driver usbhid [ 2.079844] usbhid: USB HID core driver [ 2.236660] EXT4-fs (sda1): mounted filesystem with ordered data mode. Opts: (null) [ 12.150230] ADDRCONF(NETDEV_UP): eth0: link is not ready [ 12.177342] udevd[333]: starting version 175 [ 12.195524] Adding 417684k swap on /dev/sda2. Priority:-1 extents:1 across:417684k [ 12.278032] lp: driver loaded but no devices found [ 12.516456] logitech-djreceiver 0003:046D:C52B.0003: hiddev0,hidraw0: USB HID v1.11 Device [Logitech USB Receiver] on usb-0000:00:1a.1-1/input2 [ 12.520297] input: Logitech Unifying Device. Wireless PID:1024 as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1a.1/usb4/4-1/4-1:1.2/0003:046D:C52B.0003/input/input2 [ 12.520753] logitech-djdevice 0003:046D:C52B.0004: input,hidraw1: USB HID v1.11 Mouse [Logitech Unifying Device. Wireless PID:1024] on usb-0000:00:1a.1-1:1 [ 12.523286] input: Logitech Unifying Device. Wireless PID:2011 as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1a.1/usb4/4-1/4-1:1.2/0003:046D:C52B.0003/input/input3 [ 12.524439] logitech-djdevice 0003:046D:C52B.0005: input,hidraw2: USB HID v1.11 Keyboard [Logitech Unifying Device. Wireless PID:2011] on usb-0000:00:1a.1-1:2 [ 12.545746] type=1400 audit(1336771433.137:2): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/sbin/dhclient" pid=502 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 12.546574] type=1400 audit(1336771433.137:3): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/usr/lib/NetworkManager/nm-dhcp-client.action" pid=502 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 12.547034] type=1400 audit(1336771433.137:4): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/usr/lib/connman/scripts/dhclient-script" pid=502 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 12.626869] Linux video capture interface: v2.00 [ 12.649104] uvcvideo: Found UVC 1.00 device <unnamed> (046d:081a) [ 12.668665] input: UVC Camera (046d:081a) as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1a.7/usb1/1-5/1-5:1.0/input/input4 [ 12.668909] usbcore: registered new interface driver uvcvideo [ 12.668914] USB Video Class driver (1.1.1) [ 12.697645] snd_hda_intel 0000:00:1b.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 22 (level, low) -> IRQ 22 [ 12.697721] snd_hda_intel 0000:00:1b.0: irq 45 for MSI/MSI-X [ 12.697760] snd_hda_intel 0000:00:1b.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 12.706772] nvidia: module license 'NVIDIA' taints kernel. [ 12.706778] Disabling lock debugging due to kernel taint [ 12.735428] EXT4-fs (sda1): re-mounted. Opts: errors=remount-ro [ 13.350252] nvidia 0000:01:00.0: PCI INT A -> GSI 16 (level, low) -> IRQ 16 [ 13.350267] nvidia 0000:01:00.0: setting latency timer to 64 [ 13.350275] vgaarb: device changed decodes: PCI:0000:01:00.0,olddecodes=io+mem,decodes=none:owns=io+mem [ 13.351464] NVRM: loading NVIDIA UNIX x86 Kernel Module 295.40 Thu Apr 5 21:28:09 PDT 2012 [ 13.356785] hda_codec: ALC889A: BIOS auto-probing. [ 13.357267] init: failsafe main process (658) killed by TERM signal [ 13.372756] input: HDA Intel Line as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input5 [ 13.373173] input: HDA Intel Front Mic as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input6 [ 13.373568] input: HDA Intel Rear Mic as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input7 [ 13.373954] input: HDA Intel Front Headphone as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input8 [ 13.374339] input: HDA Intel Line-Out Side as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input9 [ 13.374715] input: HDA Intel Line-Out CLFE as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input10 [ 13.375109] input: HDA Intel Line-Out Surround as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input11 [ 13.375724] input: HDA Intel Line-Out Front as /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1b.0/sound/card0/input12 [ 13.475252] type=1400 audit(1336771434.065:5): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_replace" name="/sbin/dhclient" pid=735 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.477026] type=1400 audit(1336771434.069:6): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_replace" name="/usr/lib/NetworkManager/nm-dhcp-client.action" pid=735 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.477695] type=1400 audit(1336771434.069:7): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_replace" name="/usr/lib/connman/scripts/dhclient-script" pid=735 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.479048] type=1400 audit(1336771434.069:8): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/usr/lib/lightdm/lightdm/lightdm-guest-session-wrapper" pid=734 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.488994] type=1400 audit(1336771434.081:9): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/usr/lib/telepathy/mission-control-5" pid=738 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.489972] type=1400 audit(1336771434.081:10): apparmor="STATUS" operation="profile_load" name="/usr/lib/telepathy/telepathy-*" pid=738 comm="apparmor_parser" [ 13.

    Read the article

  • Cluster Node Recovery Using Second Node in Solaris Cluster

    - by Onur Bingul
    Assumptions:Node 0a is the cluster node that has crashed and could not boot anymore.Node 0b is the node in cluster and in production with services active.Both nodes have their boot disk mirrored via SDS/SVM.We have many options to clone the boot disk from node 0b:- make a copy via network using the ufsdump command and pipe to ufsrestore - make a copy inserting the disk locally on node 0b and creating the third mirror with SDS- make a copy inserting the disk locally on node 0b using dd commandIn this procedure we are going to use dd command (from my experience this is the best option).Bare in mind that in the examples provided we work on Sun Fire V240 systems which have SCSI internal disks. In the case of Fibre Channel (FC) internal disks you must pay attention to the unique identifier, or World Wide Name (WWN), associated with each FC disk (in this case take a look at infodoc #40133 in order to recreate the device tree correctly).Procedure:On node 0b the boot disk is c1t0d0 (c1t1d0 mirror) and this is the VTOC:* Partition  Tag  Flags    Sector     Count    Sector  Mount Directory      0      2    00          0   2106432   2106431      1      3    01    2106432  74630784  76737215      2      5    00          0 143349312 143349311      4      7    00   76737216  50340672 127077887      5      4    00  127077888  14683968 141761855      6      0    00  141761856   1058304 142820159      7      0    00  142820160    529152 143349311We will insert the new disk on node 0b and it will be seen as c1t2d0.1) On node 0b we make a copy via dd from disk c1t0d0s2 to disk c1t2d0s2# dd if=/dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s2 of=/dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s2 bs=8192kA copy of a 72GB disk will take approximately about 45 minutes.Note: as an alternative to make identical copy of root over network follow Document ID: 47498Title: Sun[TM] Cluster 3.0: How to Rebuild a node with Veritas Volume Manager2) Perform an fsck on disk c1t2d0 data slices:   1.  fsck -o f /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s0 (root)   2.  fsck -o f /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s4 (/var)   3.  fsck -o f /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s5 (/usr)   4.  fsck -o f /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s6 (/globaldevices)3) Mount the root file system in order to edit following files for changing the node name:# mount /dev/dsk/c1t2d0s0 /mntChange the hostname from 0b to 0a:# cd /mnt/etc# vi hosts # vi hostname.bge0 # vi hostname.bge2 # vi nodename 4) Change the /mnt/etc/vfstab from the actual:/dev/md/dsk/d201        -       -       swap    -       no      -/dev/md/dsk/d200        /dev/md/rdsk/d200       /       ufs     1       no      -/dev/md/dsk/d205        /dev/md/rdsk/d205       /usr    ufs     1       no      logging/dev/md/dsk/d204        /dev/md/rdsk/d204       /var    ufs     1       no      logging#/dev/md/dsk/d206       /dev/md/rdsk/d206       /globaldevices  ufs     2       yes     loggingswap    -       /tmp    tmpfs   -       yes     -/dev/md/dsk/d206        /dev/md/rdsk/d206       /global/.devices/node@2 ufs     2       noglobalto this (unencapsulate disk from SDS/SVM):/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s1        -       -       swap    -       no      -/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s0       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s0       /       ufs     1       no      -/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s5       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s5       /usr    ufs     1       no      logging/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s4       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s4       /var    ufs     1       no      logging#/dev/md/dsk/d206       /dev/md/rdsk/d206       /globaldevices  ufs     2       yes     loggingswap    -       /tmp    tmpfs   -       yes     -/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s6       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6       /global/.devices/node@1 ufs     2       no globalIt is important that global device partition (slice 6) in the new vfstab will point to the physical partition of the disk (in our case slice 6).Be careful with the name you use for the new disk. In this case we define it as c1t0d0 because we will insert it as target 0 in node 0a.But this could be different based on the configuration you are working on.5) Remove following entry from /mnt/etc/system (part of unencapsulation procedure):rootdev:/pseudo/md@0:0,200,blk6) Correct the link shared -> ../../global/.devices/node@2/dev/md/shared in order to point to the nodeid of node 0a (in our case nodeid 1):# cd /mnt/dev/mdhow it is now.... node 0b has nodeid 2lrwxrwxrwx   1 root     root          42 Mar 10  2005 shared ->../../global/.devices/node@2/dev/md/shared# rm shared# ln -s ../../global/.devices/node@1/dev/md/shared sharedhow is going to be... with nodeid 1 for node 0alrwxrwxrwx   1 root     root          42 Mar 10  2005 shared ->../../global/.devices/node@1/dev/md/shared7) Change nodeid (in our case from 2 to 1):# cd /mnt/etc/cluster# vi nodeid8) Change the file /mnt/etc/path_to_inst in order to reflect the correct nodeid for node 0a:# cd /mnt/etc# vi path_to_instChange entries from node@2 to node@1 with the vi command ":%s/node@2/node@1/g"9) Write the bootblock to the disk... just in case:# /usr/sbin/installboot /usr/platform/sun4u/lib/fs/ufs/bootblk /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s0Now the disk is ready to be inserted in node 0a in order to bootup the node.10) Bootup node 0a with command "boot -sx"... this is becasue we need to make some changes in ccr files in order to recreate did environment.11) Modify cluster ccr:# cd /etc/cluster/ccr# rm did_instances# rm did_instances.bak# vi directory - remove the did_instances line.# /usr/cluster/lib/sc/ccradm -i /etc/cluster/ccr/directory # grep ccr_gennum /etc/cluster/ccr/directory ccr_gennum -1 # /usr/cluster/lib/sc/ccradm -i /etc/cluster/ccr/infrastructure # grep ccr_gennum /etc/cluster/ccr/infrastructure ccr_gennum -112) Bring the node 0a down again to the ok prompt and then issue the command "boot -r"Now the node will join the cluster and from scstat and metaset command you can verify functionality. Next step is to encapsulate the boot disk in SDS/SVM and create the mirrors.In our case node 0b has metadevice name starting from d200. For this reason on node 0a we need to create metadevice starting from d100. This is just an example, you can have different names.The important thing to remember is that metadevice boot disks have different names on each node.13) Remove metadevice pointing to the boot and mirror disks (inherit from node 0b):# metaclear -r -f d200# metaclear -r -f d201# metaclear -r -f d204# metaclear -r -f d205# metaclear -r -f d206verify from metastat that no metadevices are set for boot and mirror disks.14) Encapsulate the boot disk:# metainit -f d110 1 1 c1t0d0s0# metainit d100 -m d110# metaroot d10015) Reboot node 0a.16) Create all the metadevice for slices remaining on boot disk# metainit -f d111 1 1 c1t0d0s1# metainit d101 -m d111# metainit -f d114 1 1 c1t0d0s4# metainit d104 -m d114# metainit -f d115 1 1 c1t0d0s5# metainit d105 -m d115# metainit -f d116 1 1 c1t0d0s6# metainit d106 -m d11617) Edit the vfstab in order to specifiy metadevices created:old:/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s1        -       -       swap    -       no      -/dev/md/dsk/d100        /dev/md/rdsk/d100       /       ufs     1       no      -/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s5       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s5       /usr    ufs     1       no      logging/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s4       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s4       /var    ufs     1       no      logging#/dev/md/dsk/d206       /dev/md/rdsk/d206       /globaldevices  ufs     2       yes     loggingswap    -       /tmp    tmpfs   -       yes     -/dev/dsk/c1t0d0s6       /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0s6       /global/.devices/node@1 ufs      2       no  globalnew:/dev/md/dsk/d101        -       -       swap    -       no      -/dev/md/dsk/d100        /dev/md/rdsk/d100       /       ufs     1       no      -/dev/md/dsk/d105        /dev/md/rdsk/d105       /usr    ufs     1       no      logging/dev/md/dsk/d104        /dev/md/rdsk/d104       /var    ufs     1       no      logging#/dev/md/dsk/106       /dev/md/rdsk/d106       /globaldevices  ufs     2       yes     loggingswap    -       /tmp    tmpfs   -       yes     -/dev/md/dsk/d106        /dev/md/rdsk/d106       /global/.devices/node@1 ufs     2       noglobal18) Reboot node 0a in order to check new SDS/SVM boot configuration.19) Label the mirror disk c1t1d0 with the VTOC of boot disk c1t0d0:# prtvtoc /dev/dsk/c1t0d0s2 > /var/tmp/VTOC_c1t0d0 # fmthard -s /var/tmp/VTOC_c1t0d0 /dev/rdsk/c1t1d0s220) Put DB replica on slice 7 of disk c1t1d0:# metadb -a -c 3 /dev/dsk/c1t1d0s721) Create metadevice for mirror disk c1t1d0 and attach the new mirror side:# metainit d120 1 1 c1t1d0s0# metattach d100 d120# metainit d121 1 1 c1t1d0s1# metattach d101 d121# metainit d124 1 1 c1t1d0s4# metattach d104 d124# metainit d125 1 1 c1t1d0s5# metattach d105 d125# metainit d126 1 1 c1t1d0s6# metattach d106 d126

    Read the article

  • How to shoot yourself in the foot (DO NOT Read in the office)

    - by TATWORTH
    Originally posted on: http://geekswithblogs.net/TATWORTH/archive/2013/06/21/how-to-shoot-yourself-in-the-foot-do-not-read.aspxLet me make it absolutely clear - the following is:merely collated by your Geek from http://www.codeproject.com/Lounge.aspx?msg=3917012#xx3917012xxvery, very very funny so you read it in the presence of others at your own riskso here is the list - you have been warned!C You shoot yourself in the foot.   C++ You accidently create a dozen instances of yourself and shoot them all in the foot. Providing emergency medical assistance is impossible since you can't tell which are bitwise copies and which are just pointing at others and saying "That's me, over there."   FORTRAN You shoot yourself in each toe, iteratively, until you run out of toes, then you read in the next foot and repeat. If you run out of bullets, you continue anyway because you have no exception-handling facility.   Modula-2 After realizing that you can't actually accomplish anything in this language, you shoot yourself in the head.   COBOL USEing a COLT 45 HANDGUN, AIM gun at LEG.FOOT, THEN place ARM.HAND.FINGER on HANDGUN.TRIGGER and SQUEEZE. THEN return HANDGUN to HOLSTER. CHECK whether shoelace needs to be retied.   Lisp You shoot yourself in the appendage which holds the gun with which you shoot yourself in the appendage which holds the gun with which you shoot yourself in the appendage which holds...   BASIC Shoot yourself in the foot with a water pistol. On big systems, continue until entire lower body is waterlogged.   Forth Foot yourself in the shoot.   APL You shoot yourself in the foot; then spend all day figuring out how to do it in fewer characters.   Pascal The compiler won't let you shoot yourself in the foot.   Snobol If you succeed, shoot yourself in the left foot. If you fail, shoot yourself in the right foot.   HyperTalk Put the first bullet of the gun into foot left of leg of you. Answer the result.   Prolog You tell your program you want to be shot in the foot. The program figures out how to do it, but the syntax doesn't allow it to explain.   370 JCL You send your foot down to MIS with a 4000-page document explaining how you want it to be shot. Three years later, your foot comes back deep-fried.   FORTRAN-77 You shoot yourself in each toe, iteratively, until you run out of toes, then you read in the next foot and repeat. If you run out of bullets, you continue anyway because you still can't do exception-processing.   Modula-2 (alternative) You perform a shooting on what might be currently a foot with what might be currently a bullet shot by what might currently be a gun.   BASIC (compiled) You shoot yourself in the foot with a BB using a SCUD missile launcher.   Visual Basic You'll really only appear to have shot yourself in the foot, but you'll have so much fun doing it that you won't care.   Forth (alternative) BULLET DUP3 * GUN LOAD FOOT AIM TRIGGER PULL BANG! EMIT DEAD IF DROP ROT THEN (This takes about five bytes of memory, executes in two to ten clock cycles on any processor and can be used to replace any existing function of the language as well as in any future words). (Welcome to bottom up programming - where you, too, can perform compiler pre-processing instead of writing code)   APL (alternative) You hear a gunshot and there's a hole in your foot, but you don't remember enough linear algebra to understand what happened. or @#&^$%&%^ foot   Pascal (alternative) Same as Modula-2 except that the bullet is not the right type for the gun and your hand is blown off.   Snobol (alternative) You grab your foot with your hand, then rewrite your hand to be a bullet. The act of shooting the original foot then changes your hand/bullet into yet another foot (a left foot).   Prolog (alternative) You attempt to shoot yourself in the foot, but the bullet, failing to find its mark, backtracks to the gun, which then explodes in your face.   COMAL You attempt to shoot yourself in the foot with a water pistol, but the bore is clogged, and the pressure build-up blows apart both the pistol and your hand. or draw_pistol aim_at_foot(left) pull_trigger hop(swearing)   Scheme As Lisp, but none of the other appendages are aware of this happening.   Algol You shoot yourself in the foot with a musket. The musket is aesthetically fascinating and the wound baffles the adolescent medic in the emergency room.   Ada If you are dumb enough to actually use this language, the United States Department of Defense will kidnap you, stand you up in front of a firing squad and tell the soldiers, "Shoot at the feet." or The Department of Defense shoots you in the foot after offering you a blindfold and a last cigarette. or After correctly packaging your foot, you attempt to concurrently load the gun, pull the trigger, scream and shoot yourself in the foot. When you try, however, you discover that your foot is of the wrong type. or After correctly packing your foot, you attempt to concurrently load the gun, pull the trigger, scream, and confidently aim at your foot knowing it is safe. However the cordite in the round does an Unchecked Conversion, fires and shoots you in the foot anyway.   Eiffel   You create a GUN object, two FOOT objects and a BULLET object. The GUN passes both the FOOT objects a reference to the BULLET. The FOOT objects increment their hole counts and forget about the BULLET. A little demon then drives a garbage truck over your feet and grabs the bullet (both of it) on the way. Smalltalk You spend so much time playing with the graphics and windowing system that your boss shoots you in the foot, takes away your workstation and makes you develop in COBOL on a character terminal. or You send the message shoot to gun, with selectors bullet and myFoot. A window pops up saying Gunpowder doesNotUnderstand: spark. After several fruitless hours spent browsing the methods for Trigger, FiringPin and IdealGas, you take the easy way out and create ShotFoot, a subclass of Foot with an additional instance variable bulletHole. Object Oriented Pascal You perform a shooting on what might currently be a foot with what might currently be a bullet fired from what might currently be a gun.   PL/I You consume all available system resources, including all the offline bullets. The Data Processing & Payroll Department doubles its size, triples its budget, acquires four new mainframes and drops the original one on your foot. Postscript foot bullets 6 locate loadgun aim gun shoot showpage or It takes the bullet ten minutes to travel from the gun to your foot, by which time you're long since gone out to lunch. The text comes out great, though.   PERL You stab yourself in the foot repeatedly with an incredibly large and very heavy Swiss Army knife. or You pick up the gun and begin to load it. The gun and your foot begin to grow to huge proportions and the world around you slows down, until the gun fires. It makes a tiny hole, which you don't feel. Assembly Language You crash the OS and overwrite the root disk. The system administrator arrives and shoots you in the foot. After a moment of contemplation, the administrator shoots himself in the foot and then hops around the room rabidly shooting at everyone in sight. or You try to shoot yourself in the foot only to discover you must first reinvent the gun, the bullet, and your foot.or The bullet travels to your foot instantly, but it took you three weeks to load the round and aim the gun.   BCPL You shoot yourself somewhere in the leg -- you can't get any finer resolution than that. Concurrent Euclid You shoot yourself in somebody else's foot.   Motif You spend days writing a UIL description of your foot, the trajectory, the bullet and the intricate scrollwork on the ivory handles of the gun. When you finally get around to pulling the trigger, the gun jams.   Powerbuilder While attempting to load the gun you discover that the LoadGun system function is buggy; as a work around you tape the bullet to the outside of the gun and unsuccessfully attempt to fire it with a nail. In frustration you club your foot with the butt of the gun and explain to your client that this approximates the functionality of shooting yourself in the foot and that the next version of Powerbuilder will fix it.   Standard ML By the time you get your code to typecheck, you're using a shoot to foot yourself in the gun.   MUMPS You shoot 583149 AK-47 teflon-tipped, hollow-point, armour-piercing bullets into even-numbered toes on odd-numbered feet of everyone in the building -- with one line of code. Three weeks later you shoot yourself in the head rather than try to modify that line.   Java You locate the Gun class, but discover that the Bullet class is abstract, so you extend it and write the missing part of the implementation. Then you implement the ShootAble interface for your foot, and recompile the Foot class. The interface lets the bullet call the doDamage method on the Foot, so the Foot can damage itself in the most effective way. Now you run the program, and call the doShoot method on the instance of the Gun class. First the Gun creates an instance of Bullet, which calls the doFire method on the Gun. The Gun calls the hit(Bullet) method on the Foot, and the instance of Bullet is passed to the Foot. But this causes an IllegalHitByBullet exception to be thrown, and you die.   Unix You shoot yourself in the foot or % ls foot.c foot.h foot.o toe.c toe.o % rm * .o rm: .o: No such file or directory % ls %   370 JCL (alternative) You shoot yourself in the head just thinking about it.   DOS JCL You first find the building you're in in the phone book, then find your office number in the corporate phone book. Then you have to write this down, then describe, in cubits, your exact location, in relation to the door (right hand side thereof). Then you need to write down the location of the gun (loading it is a proprietary utility), then you load it, and the COBOL program, and run them, and, with luck, it may be run tonight.   VMS   $ MOUNT/DENSITY=.45/LABEL=BULLET/MESSAGE="BYE" BULLET::BULLET$GUN SYS$BULLET $ SET GUN/LOAD/SAFETY=OFF/SIGHT=NONE/HAND=LEFT/CHAMBER=1/ACTION=AUTOMATIC/ LOG/ALL/FULL SYS$GUN_3$DUA3:[000000]GUN.GNU $ SHOOT/LOG/AUTO SYS$GUN SYS$SYSTEM:[FOOT]FOOT.FOOT   %DCL-W-ACTIMAGE, error activating image GUN -CLI-E-IMGNAME, image file $3$DUA240:[GUN]GUN.EXE;1 -IMGACT-F-NOTNATIVE, image is not an OpenVMS Alpha AXP image or %SYS-F-FTSHT, foot shot (fifty lines of traceback omitted) sh,csh, etc You can't remember the syntax for anything, so you spend five hours reading manual pages, then your foot falls asleep. You shoot the computer and switch to C.   Apple System 7 Double click the gun icon and a window giving a selection for guns, target areas, plus balloon help with medical remedies, and assorted sound effects. Click "shoot" button and a small bomb appears with note "Error of Type 1 has occurred."   Windows 3.1 Double click the gun icon and wait. Eventually a window opens giving a selection for guns, target areas, plus balloon help with medical remedies, and assorted sound effects. Click "shoot" button and a small box appears with note "Unable to open Shoot.dll, check that path is correct."   Windows 95 Your gun is not compatible with this OS and you must buy an upgrade and install it before you can continue. Then you will be informed that you don't have enough memory.   CP/M I remember when shooting yourself in the foot with a BB gun was a big deal.   DOS You finally found the gun, but can't locate the file with the foot for the life of you.   MSDOS You shoot yourself in the foot, but can unshoot yourself with add-on software.   Access You try to point the gun at your foot, but it shoots holes in all your Borland distribution diskettes instead.   Paradox Not only can you shoot yourself in the foot, your users can too.   dBase You squeeze the trigger, but the bullet moves so slowly that by the time your foot feels the pain, you've forgotten why you shot yourself anyway. or You buy a gun. Bullets are only available from another company and are promised to work so you buy them. Then you find out that the next version of the gun is the one scheduled to actually shoot bullets.   DBase IV, V1.0 You pull the trigger, but it turns out that the gun was a poorly designed hand grenade and the whole building blows up.   SQL You cut your foot off, send it out to a service bureau and when it returns, it has a hole in it but will no longer fit the attachment at the end of your leg. or Insert into Foot Select Bullet >From Gun.Hand Where Chamber = 'LOADED' And Trigger = 'PULLED'   Clipper You grab a bullet, get ready to insert it in the gun so that you can shoot yourself in the foot and discover that the gun that the bullets fits has not yet been built, but should be arriving in the mail _REAL_SOON_NOW_. Oracle The menus for coding foot_shooting have not been implemented yet and you can't do foot shooting in SQL.   English You put your foot in your mouth, then bite it off. (For those who don't know, English is a McDonnell Douglas/PICK query language which allegedly requires 110% of system resources to run happily.) Revelation [an implementation of the PICK Operating System] You'll be able to shoot yourself in the foot just as soon as you figure out what all these bullets are for.   FlagShip Starting at the top of your head, you aim the gun at yourself repeatedly until, half an hour later, the gun is finally pointing at your foot and you pull the trigger. A new foot with a hole in it appears but you can't work out how to get rid of the old one and your gun doesn't work anymore.   FidoNet You put your foot in your mouth, then echo it internationally.   PicoSpan [a UNIX-based computer conferencing system] You can't shoot yourself in the foot because you're not a host. or (host variation) Whenever you shoot yourself in the foot, someone opens a topic in policy about it.   Internet You put your foot in your mouth, shoot it, then spam the bullet so that everybody gets shot in the foot.   troff rmtroff -ms -Hdrwp | lpr -Pwp2 & .*place bullet in footer .B .NR FT +3i .in 4 .bu Shoot! .br .sp .in -4 .br .bp NR HD -2i .*   Genetic Algorithms You create 10,000 strings describing the best way to shoot yourself in the foot. By the time the program produces the optimal solution, humans have evolved wings and the problem is moot.   CSP (Communicating Sequential Processes) You only fail to shoot everything that isn't your foot.   MS-SQL Server MS-SQL Server’s gun comes pre-loaded with an unlimited supply of Teflon coated bullets, and it only has two discernible features: the muzzle and the trigger. If that wasn't enough, MS-SQL Server also puts the gun in your hand, applies local anesthetic to the skin of your forefinger and stitches it to the gun's trigger. Meanwhile, another process has set up a spinal block to numb your lower body. It will then proceeded to surgically remove your foot, cryogenically freeze it for preservation, and attach it to the muzzle of the gun so that no matter where you aim, you will shoot your foot. In order to avoid shooting yourself in the foot, you need to unstitch your trigger finger, remove your foot from the muzzle of the gun, and have it surgically reattached. Then you probably want to get some crutches and go out to buy a book on SQL Server Performance Tuning.   Sybase Sybase's gun requires assembly, and you need to go out and purchase your own clip and bullets to load the gun. Assembly is complicated by the fact that Sybase has hidden the gun behind a big stack of reference manuals, but it hasn't told you where that stack is. While you were off finding the gun, assembling it, buying bullets, etc., Sybase was also busy surgically removing your foot and cryogenically freezing it for preservation. Instead of attaching it to the muzzle of the gun, though, it packed your foot on dry ice and sent it UPS-Ground to an unnamed hookah bar somewhere in the middle east. In order to shoot your foot, you must modify your gun with a GPS system for targeting and hire some guy named "Indy" to find the hookah bar and wire the coordinates back to you. By this time, you've probably become so daunted at the tasks stand between you and shooting your foot that you hire a guy who's read all the books on Sybase to help you shoot your foot. If you're lucky, he'll be smart enough both to find your foot and to stop you from shooting it.   Magic software You spend 1 week looking up the correct syntax for GUN. When you find it, you realise that GUN will not let you shoot in your own foot. It will allow you to shoot almost anything but your foot. You then decide to build your own gun. You can't use the standard barrel since this will only allow for standard bullets, which will not fire if the barrel is pointed at your foot. After four weeks, you have created your own custom gun. It blows up in your hand without warning, because you failed to initialise the safety catch and it doesn't know whether the initial state is "0", 0, NULL, "ZERO", 0.0, 0,0, "0.0", or "0,00". You fix the problem with your remaining hand by nesting 12 safety catches, and then decide to build the gun without safety catch. You then shoot the management and retire to a happy life where you code in languages that will allow you to shoot your foot in under 10 days.FirefoxLets you shoot yourself in as many feet as you'd like, while using multiple great addons! IEA moving target in terms of standard ammunition size and doesn't always work properly with non-Microsoft ammunition, so sometimes you shoot something other than your foot. However, it's the corporate world's standard foot-shooting apparatus. Hackers seem to enjoy rigging websites up to trigger cascading foot-shooting failures. Windows 98 About the same as Windows 95 in terms of overall bullet capacity and triggering mechanisms. Includes updated DirectShot API. A new version was released later on to support USB guns, Windows 98 SE.WPF:You get your baseball glove and a ball and you head out to your backyard, where you throw balls to your pitchback. Then your unkempt-haired-cargo-shorts-and-sandals-with-white-socks-wearing neighbor uses XAML to sculpt your arm into a gun, the ball into a bullet and the pitchback into your foot. By now, however, only the neighbor can get it to work and he's only around from 6:30 PM - 3:30 AM. LOGO: You very carefully lay out the trajectory of the bullet. Then you start the gun, which fires very slowly. You walk precisely to the point where the bullet will travel and wait, but just before it gets to you, your class time is up and one of the other kids has already used the system to hack into Sony's PS3 network. Flash: Someone has designed a beautiful-looking gun that anyone can shoot their feet with for free. It weighs six hundred pounds. All kinds of people are shooting themselves in the feet, and sending the link to everyone else so that they can too. That is, except for the criminals, who are all stealing iOS devices that the gun won't work with.APL: Its (mostly) all greek to me. Lisp: Place ((gun in ((hand sight (foot then shoot))))) (Lots of Insipid Stupid Parentheses)Apple OS/X and iOS Once a year, Steve Jobs returns from sick leave to tell millions of unwavering fans how they will be able to shoot themselves in the foot differently this year. They retweet and blog about it ad nauseam, and wait in line to be the first to experience "shoot different".Windows ME Usually fails, even at shooting you in the foot. Yo dawg, I heard you like shooting yourself in the foot. So I put a gun in your gun, so you can shoot yourself in the foot while you shoot yourself in the foot. (Okay, I'm not especially proud of this joke.) Windows 2000 Now you really do have to log in, before you are allowed to shoot yourself in the foot.Windows XPYou thought you learned your lesson: Don't use Windows ME. Then, along came this new creature, built on top of Windows NT! So you spend the next couple days installing antivirus software, patches and service packs, just so you can get that driver to install, and then proceed to shoot yourself in the foot. Windows Vista Newer! Glossier! Shootier! Windows 7 The bullets come out a lot smoother. Active Directory Each bullet now has an attached Bullet Identifier, and can be uniquely identified. Policies can be applied to dictate fragmentation, and the gun will occasionally have a confusing delay after the trigger has been pulled. PythonYou try to use import foot; foot.shoot() only to realize that's only available in 3.0, to which you can't yet upgrade from 2.7 because of all those extension libs lacking support. Solaris Shoots best when used on SPARC hardware, but still runs the trigger GUI under Java. After weeks of learning the appropriate STOP command to prevent the trigger from automatically being pressed on boot, you think you've got it under control. Then the one time you ever use dtrace, it hits a bug that fires the gun. MySQL The feature that allows you to shoot yourself in the foot has been in development for about 6 years, and they are adding it into the next version, which is coming out REAL SOON NOW, promise! But you can always check it out of source control and try it yourself (just not in any environment where data integrity is important because it will probably explode.) PostgreSQLAllows you to have a smug look on your face while you shoot yourself in the foot, because those MySQL guys STILL don't have that feature. NoSQL Barrel? Who needs a barrel? Just put the bullet on your foot, and strike it with a hammer. See? It's so much simpler and more efficient that way. You can even strike multiple bullets in one swing if you swing with a good enough arc, because hammers are easy to use. Getting them to synchronize is a little difficult, though.Eclipse There are about a dozen different packages for shooting yourself in the foot, with weird interdependencies on outdated components. Once you finally navigate the morass and get one installed, you then have something to look at while you shoot yourself in the foot with that package: You can watch the screen redraw.Outlook Makes it really easy to let everyone know you shot yourself in the foot!Shooting yourself in the foot using delegates.You really need to shoot yourself in the foot but you hate firearms (you don't want any dependency on the specifics of shooting) so you delegate it to somebody else. You don't care how it is done as long is shooting your foot. You can do it asynchronously in case you know you may faint so you are called back/slapped in the face by your shooter/friend (or background worker) when everything is done.C#You prepare the gun and the bullet, carefully modeling all of the physics of a bullet traveling through a foot. Just before you're about to pull the trigger, you stumble on System.Windows.BodyParts.Foot.ShootAt(System.Windows.Firearms.IGun gun) in the extended framework, realize you just wasted the entire afternoon, and shoot yourself in the head.PHP<?phprequire("foot_safety_check.php");?><!DOCTYPE HTML><html><head> <!--Lower!--><title>Shooting me in the foot</title></head> <body> <!--LOWER!!!--><leg> <!--OK, I made this one up...--><footer><?php echo (dungSift($_SERVER['HTTP_USER_AGENT'], "ie"))?("Your foot is safe, but you might want to wear a hard hat!"):("<div class=\"shot\">BANG!</div>"); ?></footer></leg> </body> </html>

    Read the article

  • Using the jQuery UI Library in a MVC 3 Application to Build a Dialog Form

    - by ChrisD
    Using a simulated dialog window is a nice way to handle inline data editing. The jQuery UI has a UI widget for a dialog window that makes it easy to get up and running with it in your application. With the release of ASP.NET MVC 3, Microsoft included the jQuery UI scripts and files in the MVC 3 project templates for Visual Studio. With the release of the MVC 3 Tools Update, Microsoft implemented the inclusion of those with NuGet as packages. That means we can get up and running using the latest version of the jQuery UI with minimal effort. To the code! Another that might interested you about JQuery Mobile and ASP.NET MVC 3 with C#. If you are starting with a new MVC 3 application and have the Tools Update then you are a NuGet update and a <link> and <script> tag away from adding the jQuery UI to your project. If you are using an existing MVC project you can still get the jQuery UI library added to your project via NuGet and then add the link and script tags. Assuming that you have pulled down the latest version (at the time of this publish it was 1.8.13) you can add the following link and script tags to your <head> tag: < link href = "@Url.Content(" ~ / Content / themes / base / jquery . ui . all . css ")" rel = "Stylesheet" type = "text/css" /> < script src = "@Url.Content(" ~ / Scripts / jquery-ui-1 . 8 . 13 . min . js ")" type = "text/javascript" ></ script > The jQuery UI library relies upon the CSS scripts and some image files to handle rendering of its widgets (you can choose a different theme or role your own if you like). Adding these to the stock _Layout.cshtml file results in the following markup: <!DOCTYPE html> < html > < head >     < meta charset = "utf-8" />     < title > @ViewBag.Title </ title >     < link href = "@Url.Content(" ~ / Content / Site . css ")" rel = "stylesheet" type = "text/css" />     <link href="@Url.Content("~/Content/themes/base/jquery.ui.all.css")" rel="Stylesheet" type="text/css" />     <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/jquery-1.5.1.min.js")" type="text/javascript"></script>     <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/modernizr-1.7.min . js ")" type = "text/javascript" ></ script >     < script src = "@Url.Content(" ~ / Scripts / jquery-ui-1 . 8 . 13 . min . js ")" type = "text/javascript" ></ script > </ head > < body >     @RenderBody() </ body > </ html > Our example will involve building a list of notes with an id, title and description. Each note can be edited and new notes can be added. The user will never have to leave the single page of notes to manage the note data. The add and edit forms will be delivered in a jQuery UI dialog widget and the note list content will get reloaded via an AJAX call after each change to the list. To begin, we need to craft a model and a data management class. We will do this so we can simulate data storage and get a feel for the workflow of the user experience. The first class named Note will have properties to represent our data model. namespace Website . Models {     public class Note     {         public int Id { get ; set ; }         public string Title { get ; set ; }         public string Body { get ; set ; }     } } The second class named NoteManager will be used to set up our simulated data storage and provide methods for querying and updating the data. We will take a look at the class content as a whole and then walk through each method after. using System . Collections . ObjectModel ; using System . Linq ; using System . Web ; namespace Website . Models {     public class NoteManager     {         public Collection < Note > Notes         {             get             {                 if ( HttpRuntime . Cache [ "Notes" ] == null )                     this . loadInitialData ();                 return ( Collection < Note >) HttpRuntime . Cache [ "Notes" ];             }         }         private void loadInitialData ()         {             var notes = new Collection < Note >();             notes . Add ( new Note                           {                               Id = 1 ,                               Title = "Set DVR for Sunday" ,                               Body = "Don't forget to record Game of Thrones!"                           });             notes . Add ( new Note                           {                               Id = 2 ,                               Title = "Read MVC article" ,                               Body = "Check out the new iwantmymvc.com post"                           });             notes . Add ( new Note                           {                               Id = 3 ,                               Title = "Pick up kid" ,                               Body = "Daughter out of school at 1:30pm on Thursday. Don't forget!"                           });             notes . Add ( new Note                           {                               Id = 4 ,                               Title = "Paint" ,                               Body = "Finish the 2nd coat in the bathroom"                           });             HttpRuntime . Cache [ "Notes" ] = notes ;         }         public Collection < Note > GetAll ()         {             return Notes ;         }         public Note GetById ( int id )         {             return Notes . Where ( i => i . Id == id ). FirstOrDefault ();         }         public int Save ( Note item )         {             if ( item . Id <= 0 )                 return saveAsNew ( item );             var existingNote = Notes . Where ( i => i . Id == item . Id ). FirstOrDefault ();             existingNote . Title = item . Title ;             existingNote . Body = item . Body ;             return existingNote . Id ;         }         private int saveAsNew ( Note item )         {             item . Id = Notes . Count + 1 ;             Notes . Add ( item );             return item . Id ;         }     } } The class has a property named Notes that is read only and handles instantiating a collection of Note objects in the runtime cache if it doesn't exist, and then returns the collection from the cache. This property is there to give us a simulated storage so that we didn't have to add a full blown database (beyond the scope of this post). The private method loadInitialData handles pre-filling the collection of Note objects with some initial data and stuffs them into the cache. Both of these chunks of code would be refactored out with a move to a real means of data storage. The GetAll and GetById methods access our simulated data storage to return all of our notes or a specific note by id. The Save method takes in a Note object, checks to see if it has an Id less than or equal to zero (we assume that an Id that is not greater than zero represents a note that is new) and if so, calls the private method saveAsNew . If the Note item sent in has an Id , the code finds that Note in the simulated storage, updates the Title and Description , and returns the Id value. The saveAsNew method sets the Id , adds it to the simulated storage, and returns the Id value. The increment of the Id is simulated here by getting the current count of the note collection and adding 1 to it. The setting of the Id is the only other chunk of code that would be refactored out when moving to a different data storage approach. With our model and data manager code in place we can turn our attention to the controller and views. We can do all of our work in a single controller. If we use a HomeController , we can add an action method named Index that will return our main view. An action method named List will get all of our Note objects from our manager and return a partial view. We will use some jQuery to make an AJAX call to that action method and update our main view with the partial view content returned. Since the jQuery AJAX call will cache the call to the content in Internet Explorer by default (a setting in jQuery), we will decorate the List, Create and Edit action methods with the OutputCache attribute and a duration of 0. This will send the no-cache flag back in the header of the content to the browser and jQuery will pick that up and not cache the AJAX call. The Create action method instantiates a new Note model object and returns a partial view, specifying the NoteForm.cshtml view file and passing in the model. The NoteForm view is used for the add and edit functionality. The Edit action method takes in the Id of the note to be edited, loads the Note model object based on that Id , and does the same return of the partial view as the Create method. The Save method takes in the posted Note object and sends it to the manager to save. It is decorated with the HttpPost attribute to ensure that it will only be available via a POST. It returns a Json object with a property named Success that can be used by the UX to verify everything went well (we won't use that in our example). Both the add and edit actions in the UX will post to the Save action method, allowing us to reduce the amount of unique jQuery we need to write in our view. The contents of the HomeController.cs file: using System . Web . Mvc ; using Website . Models ; namespace Website . Controllers {     public class HomeController : Controller     {         public ActionResult Index ()         {             return View ();         }         [ OutputCache ( Duration = 0 )]         public ActionResult List ()         {             var manager = new NoteManager ();             var model = manager . GetAll ();             return PartialView ( model );         }         [ OutputCache ( Duration = 0 )]         public ActionResult Create ()         {             var model = new Note ();             return PartialView ( "NoteForm" , model );         }         [ OutputCache ( Duration = 0 )]         public ActionResult Edit ( int id )         {             var manager = new NoteManager ();             var model = manager . GetById ( id );             return PartialView ( "NoteForm" , model );         }         [ HttpPost ]         public JsonResult Save ( Note note )         {             var manager = new NoteManager ();             var noteId = manager . Save ( note );             return Json ( new { Success = noteId > 0 });         }     } } The view for the note form, NoteForm.cshtml , looks like so: @model Website . Models . Note @using ( Html . BeginForm ( "Save" , "Home" , FormMethod . Post , new { id = "NoteForm" })) { @Html . Hidden ( "Id" ) < label class = "Title" >     < span > Title < /span><br / >     @Html . TextBox ( "Title" ) < /label> <label class="Body">     <span>Body</ span >< br />     @Html . TextArea ( "Body" ) < /label> } It is a strongly typed view for our Note model class. We give the <form> element an id attribute so that we can reference it via jQuery. The <label> and <span> tags give our UX some structure that we can style with some CSS. The List.cshtml view is used to render out a <ul> element with all of our notes. @model IEnumerable < Website . Models . Note > < ul class = "NotesList" >     @foreach ( var note in Model )     {     < li >         @note . Title < br />         @note . Body < br />         < span class = "EditLink ButtonLink" noteid = "@note.Id" > Edit < /span>     </ li >     } < /ul> This view is strongly typed as well. It includes a <span> tag that we will use as an edit button. We add a custom attribute named noteid to the <span> tag that we can use in our jQuery to identify the Id of the note object we want to edit. The view, Index.cshtml , contains a bit of html block structure and all of our jQuery logic code. @ {     ViewBag . Title = "Index" ; } < h2 > Notes < /h2> <div id="NoteListBlock"></ div > < span class = "AddLink ButtonLink" > Add New Note < /span> <div id="NoteDialog" title="" class="Hidden"></ div > < script type = "text/javascript" >     $ ( function () {         $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). dialog ({             autoOpen : false , width : 400 , height : 330 , modal : true ,             buttons : {                 "Save" : function () {                     $ . post ( "/Home/Save" ,                         $ ( "#NoteForm" ). serialize (),                         function () {                             $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). dialog ( "close" );                             LoadList ();                         });                 },                 Cancel : function () { $ ( this ). dialog ( "close" ); }             }         });         $ ( ".EditLink" ). live ( "click" , function () {             var id = $ ( this ). attr ( "noteid" );             $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). html ( "" )                 . dialog ( "option" , "title" , "Edit Note" )                 . load ( "/Home/Edit/" + id , function () { $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). dialog ( "open" ); });         });         $ ( ".AddLink" ). click ( function () {             $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). html ( "" )                 . dialog ( "option" , "title" , "Add Note" )                 . load ( "/Home/Create" , function () { $ ( "#NoteDialog" ). dialog ( "open" ); });         });         LoadList ();     });     function LoadList () {         $ ( "#NoteListBlock" ). load ( "/Home/List" );     } < /script> The <div> tag with the id attribute of "NoteListBlock" is used as a container target for the load of the partial view content of our List action method. It starts out empty and will get loaded with content via jQuery once the DOM is loaded. The <div> tag with the id attribute of "NoteDialog" is the element for our dialog widget. The jQuery UI library will use the title attribute for the text in the dialog widget top header bar. We start out with it empty here and will dynamically change the text via jQuery based on the request to either add or edit a note. This <div> tag is given a CSS class named "Hidden" that will set the display:none style on the element. Since our call to the jQuery UI method to make the element a dialog widget will occur in the jQuery document ready code block, the end user will see the <div> element rendered in their browser as the page renders and then it will hide after that jQuery call. Adding the display:hidden to the <div> element via CSS will ensure that it is never rendered until the user triggers the request to open the dialog. The jQuery document load block contains the setup for the dialog node, click event bindings for the edit and add links, and a call to a JavaScript function called LoadList that handles the AJAX call to the List action method. The .dialog() method is called on the "NoteDialog" <div> element and the options are set for the dialog widget. The buttons option defines 2 buttons and their click actions. The first is the "Save" button (the text in quotations is used as the text for the button) that will do an AJAX post to our Save action method and send the serialized form data from the note form (targeted with the id attribute "NoteForm"). Upon completion it will close the dialog widget and call the LoadList to update the UX without a redirect. The "Cancel" button simply closes the dialog widget. The .live() method handles binding a function to the "click" event on all elements with the CSS class named EditLink . We use the .live() method because it will catch and bind our function to elements even as the DOM changes. Since we will be constantly changing the note list as we add and edit we want to ensure that the edit links get wired up with click events. The function for the click event on the edit links gets the noteid attribute and stores it in a local variable. Then it clears out the HTML in the dialog element (to ensure a fresh start), calls the .dialog() method and sets the "title" option (this sets the title attribute value), and then calls the .load() AJAX method to hit our Edit action method and inject the returned content into the "NoteDialog" <div> element. Once the .load() method is complete it opens the dialog widget. The click event binding for the add link is similar to the edit, only we don't need to get the id value and we load the Create action method. This binding is done via the .click() method because it will only be bound on the initial load of the page. The add button will always exist. Finally, we toss in some CSS in the Content/Site.css file to style our form and the add/edit links. . ButtonLink { color : Blue ; cursor : pointer ; } . ButtonLink : hover { text - decoration : underline ; } . Hidden { display : none ; } #NoteForm label { display:block; margin-bottom:6px; } #NoteForm label > span { font-weight:bold; } #NoteForm input[type=text] { width:350px; } #NoteForm textarea { width:350px; height:80px; } With all of our code in place we can do an F5 and see our list of notes: If we click on an edit link we will get the dialog widget with the correct note data loaded: And if we click on the add new note link we will get the dialog widget with the empty form: The end result of our solution tree for our sample:

    Read the article

  • How to disabled the input,textarea,select using this code..

    - by kumar
    Hello friends I am using this code in my view.. <%@ Control Language="C#" Inherits="System.Web.Mvc.ViewUserControl<NorthernTrust.ATP.iTool.Core.Business.Entities.Exceptions.PricingMassEditBE>" %> <script type="text/javascript"> $("#PricingEditExceptions").find("input, select,textarea").attr('disabled', 'disabled'); </script> <%var a = Model; %> <fieldset id="PricingEditExceptions"> <div class="fiveper"> <label>FM#: <span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.FundmasterSec : null%></span></label> <label>TNT#:<span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.TNTSecurity: null%></span></label> <label>CUSIP#: <span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.CUSIP :null%></span></label> <label>Asset:<span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.AssetClassCode: null%></span></label> <label>Issue:<span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.IssueType: null%></span></label> <label>COQ:<span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.CodeCountryofQuotationName: null%></span></label> <label>CCY:<span><%=(null != a) ? Model.Asset.CurrencyCode: null%></span></label> <label>&nbsp;</label> </div> <div class="fiveper"> <input id="check1" type="checkbox" name="PMchk" value="<%=Model.ExceptionID%>" /> <label>ID#: <span><%=(null != a) ? Model.ExceptionID : 0%></span></label> <label for="ExceptionStatus"> Status: <span id="gui-stat-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>"> <%=Model.LookupCodes["C_EXCPT_STAT"].FirstOrDefault(model => model.Key.Trim().Equals(Model.ExceptionStatus.Trim())).Value%></span> </label> <label for="ResolutionCode"> Resolution: <span> <%=Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ResolutionCode, new SelectList(Model.LookupCodes["C_EXCPT_RESL"], "Key", "Value", (null != Model.ResolutionCode) ? Model.ResolutionCode.Trim() : Model.ResolutionCode))%> </span> </label> <label for="ReasonCode"> Reason: <span><%=Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ReasonCode, new SelectList(Model.LookupCodes["C_EXCPT_RSN"], "Key", "Value", (null != Model.ReasonCode) ? Model.ReasonCode.Trim() : Model.ReasonCode))%></span> </label> <label>Action Taken:<span><%=Html.DropDownListFor(model => model.ActionCode, new SelectList(Model.LookupCodes["C_EXCPT_ACT"], "Key", "Value", (null != Model.ActionCode) ? Model.ActionCode.Trim() : Model.ActionCode))%></span></label> <label>&nbsp;</label> </div> <div class="fiveper"> <label>Follow-Up:<span class="datepicker-container"><input type="text" id="exc-flwup-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>" name="exc-flwup-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>" value="<%=Model.FollowupDate %>" /></span></label> <label>Inqurity #: <span><%=Html.EditorFor(model => model.IOL)%></span> </label> <label>&nbsp;</label> <label>Comment: <span> <%=Html.TextAreaFor(model => model.Comment, new { })%> <%=Html.ValidationMessageFor(model => model.Comment)%> </span> </label> </div> <div id="hide" style="display:none"> <label><span><%=Model.Sequence %></span></label> <label><span><%=Model.AssignedId %></span></label> <span id="gui-stat-<%=Model.ExceptionID%>"> <%=Model.LookupCodes["C_EXCPT_STAT"].FirstOrDefault(model => model.Key.Trim().Equals(Model.ExceptionStatus.Trim())).Value%></span> <span>Last Updated:</span> <%=Model.LastUpdateUser.StartsWith("ATPB") ? "SYSTEM" : Model.LastUpdateUser%><br /> <%=Model.LastUpdated%> <% if (DateTime.Now.Date == Model.LastUpdated.Value .Date ) {%> <%=Math.Round((DateTime.Now - (DateTime)Model.LastUpdated).TotalHours, 0)%> hr<%} %> <p> <%=Html.EditorFor(model => model.SequenceDateTimeAsString)%> <%=Html.EditorFor(model => model.AssignedId)%> <span><%=Html.EditorFor(model => model.Origination)%></span> </p> </div> </fieldset> <script type="text/javascript"> $(document).ready(function() { function validate_excpt(formData, jqForm, options) { var form = jqForm[0]; } // post-submit callback function showResponse(responseText, statusText, xhr, $form) { if (responseText.substring(0, 16) != "System.Exception") { $('#error-msg-<%=Model.ExceptionID %> span:last').html('<strong>Update successful.</strong>'); } else { $('#error-msg-<%=Model.ExceptionID %> span:last').html('<strong>Update failed.</strong> ' + responseText.substring(0, 48)); } $('#error-msg-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>').removeClass('hide'); $('#gui-stat-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>').html(responseText[1]); } $('#exc-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>').ajaxForm({ target: '#error-msg-<%=Model.ExceptionID %>', beforeSubmit: validate_excpt, success: showResponse, dataType: 'json' }).enable(<%=Model.EnableEdit.ToString().ToLower() %>); $("input[id^='exc-flwup-']").datepicker({ duration: 0, buttonImage: '/Content/images/calender.gif', buttonImageOnly: true, showOn:'button', constrainInput: true, showTime: true, stepMinutes: 30, stepHours: 1, altTimeField: '', time24h: true, minDate: 0 }); $("input[id^='exc-flwup-<%=Model.ExceptionID%>']").click(function() { $(this).val(''); }); $('#ui-timepicker-div').bgiframe(); }); </script> Using this code I am disabling the fields when the view loads.. like this my view displyas for number of users which I am going to selct using this below code I am able to disable only first Fiedset not for other fieldsets? $("#Fieldset1").find("input, select,textarea").attr('disabled', 'disabled'); why its happening? I need to disable for how many users I select.... thanks..

    Read the article

  • how to reload jqgrid in asp.net mvc when i change dropdownlist

    - by sandeep
    what is wrong in this code? when i change drop down list,the grid takes old value of ddl only, not taken newely selected values why? <%--<asp:Content ID="Content2script" ContentPlaceHolderID="HeadScript" runat="server"> <script type="text/javascript"> $(function() { $("#StateId").change(function() { $('#TheForm').submit(); }); }); $(function() { $("#CityId").change(function() { $('#TheForm').submit(); }); }); $(function() { $("#HospitalName").change(function() { $('#TheForm').submit(); }); }); </script > </asp:Content>--%> <asp:Content ID="Content3" ContentPlaceHolderID="HeadContent" runat="server"> <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="/scripts/themes/coffee/grid.css" title="coffee" media="screen" /> <script src="/Scripts/jquery-1.3.2.js" type="text/javascript"></script> <script src="/Scripts/jquery.jqGrid.js" type="text/javascript"></script> <script src="/Scripts/js/jqModal.js" type="text/javascript"></script> <script src="/Scripts/js/jqDnR.js" type="text/javascript"></script> <script type="text/javascript"> var gridimgpath = '/scripts/themes/coffee/images'; var gridDataUrl = '/Claim/DynamicGridData/'; jQuery(document).ready(function() { // $("#btnSearch").click(function() { var StateId = document.getElementById('StateId').value; var CityId = document.getElementById('CityId').value; var HName = document.getElementById('HospitalName').value; // alert(CityId); // alert(StateId); // alert(HName); if (StateId > 0 && CityId == '' && HName == '') { CityId = 0; HName = 'Default'.toString(); // alert("elseif0" + HName.toString()); } else if (CityId > 0 && StateId == '') { // alert("elseif1"); alert("Please Select State..") } else if (CityId > 0 && StateId > 0 && HName == '') { // alert("elseif2"); alert(CityId); alert(StateId); HName = "Default"; } else { // alert("else"); StateId = 0; CityId = 0; HName = "Default"; } jQuery("#list").jqGrid({ url: gridDataUrl + '?StateId=' + StateId + '&CityId=' + CityId + '&hospname=' + HName, datatype: 'json', mtype: 'GET', colNames: ['Id', 'HospitalName', 'Address', 'City', 'District', 'FaxNumber', 'PhoneNumber'], colModel: [{ name: 'HospitalId', index: 'HospitalId', width: 40, align: 'left' }, { name: 'HospitalName', index: 'HospitalName', width: 40, align: 'left' }, { name: 'Address1', Address: 'Address1', width: 300 }, { name: 'CityName', index: 'CityName', width: 100 }, { name: 'DistName', index: 'DistName', width: 100 }, { name: 'FaxNo', index: 'FaxNo', width: 100 }, { name: 'ContactNo1', index: 'PhoneNumber', width: 100 } ], pager: jQuery('#pager'), rowNum: 10, rowList: [5, 10, 20, 50], // sortname: 'Id,', sortname: '1', sortorder: "asc", viewrecords: true, //multiselect: true, //multikey: "ctrlKey", // imgpath: '/scripts/themes/coffee/images', imgpath: gridimgpath, caption: 'Hospital Search', width: 700, height: 250 }); $(function() { // $("#btnSearch").click(function() { $('#CityId').change(function() { alert("kjasd"); // Set the vars whenever the date range changes and then filter the results StateId = document.getElementById('StateId').value; CityId = document.getElementById('CityId').value; HName = 'default'; setGridUrl(); }); // Set the date range textbox values $('#StateId').val(StateId.toString()); $('#CityId').val(CityId.toString()); // Set the grid json url to get the data to display setGridUrl(); }); function setGridUrl() { alert(StateId); alert(CityId); alert("hi"); var newGridDataUrl = gridDataUrl + '?StateId=' + StateId + '&CityId=' + CityId + '&hospname=' + HName; jQuery('#list').jqGrid('setGridParam', { url: newGridDataUrl }).trigger("reloadGrid"); } // }); }); </script> </asp:Content> <asp:Content ID="Content2" ContentPlaceHolderID="MainContent" runat="server"> <%--<%using (Html.BeginForm("HospitalSearch", "Claim", FormMethod.Post, new { id = "TheForm" })) --%> <table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2" width="100%" border="0" > <tr> <td class ="Heading1"> Hospital Search</td> <td class ="Heading1" align="right" width="50%" background="../images/homebg.gif"> &nbsp; </td> </tr> <tr> <td colspan="2" > <% Html.RenderPartial("InsuredDetails"); %> </td> </tr> <tr> <td colspan="2"> <table width="100%"> <tr> <td class="subline" valign="middle"> State : <% =Html.DropDownList("StateId", (SelectList)ViewData["States"], "--Select--", new { @class = "ddownmenu" })%> &nbsp; City : <% =Html.DropDownList("CityId", (SelectList)ViewData["Cities"], "--Select--", new { @class = "ddownmenu" })%> &nbsp; Hospital Name : <% =Html.TextBox("HospitalName")%> &nbsp; &nbsp; <input id="btnSearch" type="submit" value="Search" /> </td> </tr> </table> </td> </tr> <tr> <td align="center" colspan="2"> &nbsp;</td> </tr> </table> <div id="jqGridContainer"> <table id="list" class="scroll" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0"></table> <div id="pager" class="scroll" style="text-align:center;"></div> </div> </asp:Content>

    Read the article

  • Understanding and Implementing a Force based graph layout algorithm

    - by zcourts
    I'm trying to implement a force base graph layout algorithm, based on http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Force-based_algorithms_(graph_drawing) My first attempt didn't work so I looked at http://blog.ivank.net/force-based-graph-drawing-in-javascript.html and https://github.com/dhotson/springy I changed my implementation based on what I thought I understood from those two but I haven't managed to get it right and I'm hoping someone can help? JavaScript isn't my strong point so be gentle... If you're wondering why write my own. In reality I have no real reason to write my own I'm just trying to understand how the algorithm is implemented. Especially in my first link, that demo is brilliant. This is what I've come up with //support function.bind - https://developer.mozilla.org/en/JavaScript/Reference/Global_Objects/Function/bind#Compatibility if (!Function.prototype.bind) { Function.prototype.bind = function (oThis) { if (typeof this !== "function") { // closest thing possible to the ECMAScript 5 internal IsCallable function throw new TypeError("Function.prototype.bind - what is trying to be bound is not callable"); } var aArgs = Array.prototype.slice.call(arguments, 1), fToBind = this, fNOP = function () {}, fBound = function () { return fToBind.apply(this instanceof fNOP ? this : oThis || window, aArgs.concat(Array.prototype.slice.call(arguments))); }; fNOP.prototype = this.prototype; fBound.prototype = new fNOP(); return fBound; }; } (function() { var lastTime = 0; var vendors = ['ms', 'moz', 'webkit', 'o']; for(var x = 0; x < vendors.length && !window.requestAnimationFrame; ++x) { window.requestAnimationFrame = window[vendors[x]+'RequestAnimationFrame']; window.cancelAnimationFrame = window[vendors[x]+'CancelAnimationFrame'] || window[vendors[x]+'CancelRequestAnimationFrame']; } if (!window.requestAnimationFrame) window.requestAnimationFrame = function(callback, element) { var currTime = new Date().getTime(); var timeToCall = Math.max(0, 16 - (currTime - lastTime)); var id = window.setTimeout(function() { callback(currTime + timeToCall); }, timeToCall); lastTime = currTime + timeToCall; return id; }; if (!window.cancelAnimationFrame) window.cancelAnimationFrame = function(id) { clearTimeout(id); }; }()); function Graph(o){ this.options=o; this.vertices={}; this.edges={};//form {vertexID:{edgeID:edge}} } /** *Adds an edge to the graph. If the verticies in this edge are not already in the *graph then they are added */ Graph.prototype.addEdge=function(e){ //if vertex1 and vertex2 doesn't exist in this.vertices add them if(typeof(this.vertices[e.vertex1])==='undefined') this.vertices[e.vertex1]=new Vertex(e.vertex1); if(typeof(this.vertices[e.vertex2])==='undefined') this.vertices[e.vertex2]=new Vertex(e.vertex2); //add the edge if(typeof(this.edges[e.vertex1])==='undefined') this.edges[e.vertex1]={}; this.edges[e.vertex1][e.id]=e; } /** * Add a vertex to the graph. If a vertex with the same ID already exists then * the existing vertex's .data property is replaced with the @param v.data */ Graph.prototype.addVertex=function(v){ if(typeof(this.vertices[v.id])==='undefined') this.vertices[v.id]=v; else this.vertices[v.id].data=v.data; } function Vertex(id,data){ this.id=id; this.data=data?data:{}; //initialize to data.[x|y|z] or generate random number for each this.x = this.data.x?this.data.x:-100 + Math.random()*200; this.y = this.data.y?this.data.y:-100 + Math.random()*200; this.z = this.data.y?this.data.y:-100 + Math.random()*200; //set initial velocity to 0 this.velocity = new Point(0, 0, 0); this.mass=this.data.mass?this.data.mass:Math.random(); this.force=new Point(0,0,0); } function Edge(vertex1ID,vertex2ID){ vertex1ID=vertex1ID?vertex1ID:Math.random() vertex2ID=vertex2ID?vertex2ID:Math.random() this.id=vertex1ID+"->"+vertex2ID; this.vertex1=vertex1ID; this.vertex2=vertex2ID; } function Point(x, y, z) { this.x = x; this.y = y; this.z = z; } Point.prototype.plus=function(p){ this.x +=p.x this.y +=p.y this.z +=p.z } function ForceLayout(o){ this.repulsion = o.repulsion?o.repulsion:200; this.attraction = o.attraction?o.attraction:0.06; this.damping = o.damping?o.damping:0.9; this.graph = o.graph?o.graph:new Graph(); this.total_kinetic_energy =0; this.animationID=-1; } ForceLayout.prototype.draw=function(){ //vertex velocities initialized to (0,0,0) when a vertex is created //vertex positions initialized to random position when created cc=0; do{ this.total_kinetic_energy =0; //for each vertex for(var i in this.graph.vertices){ var thisNode=this.graph.vertices[i]; // running sum of total force on this particular node var netForce=new Point(0,0,0) //for each other node for(var j in this.graph.vertices){ if(thisNode!=this.graph.vertices[j]){ //net-force := net-force + Coulomb_repulsion( this_node, other_node ) netForce.plus(this.CoulombRepulsion( thisNode,this.graph.vertices[j])) } } //for each spring connected to this node for(var k in this.graph.edges[thisNode.id]){ //(this node, node its connected to) //pass id of this node and the node its connected to so hookesattraction //can update the force on both vertices and return that force to be //added to the net force this.HookesAttraction(thisNode.id, this.graph.edges[thisNode.id][k].vertex2 ) } // without damping, it moves forever // this_node.velocity := (this_node.velocity + timestep * net-force) * damping thisNode.velocity.x=(thisNode.velocity.x+thisNode.force.x)*this.damping; thisNode.velocity.y=(thisNode.velocity.y+thisNode.force.y)*this.damping; thisNode.velocity.z=(thisNode.velocity.z+thisNode.force.z)*this.damping; //this_node.position := this_node.position + timestep * this_node.velocity thisNode.x=thisNode.velocity.x; thisNode.y=thisNode.velocity.y; thisNode.z=thisNode.velocity.z; //normalize x,y,z??? //total_kinetic_energy := total_kinetic_energy + this_node.mass * (this_node.velocity)^2 this.total_kinetic_energy +=thisNode.mass*((thisNode.velocity.x+thisNode.velocity.y+thisNode.velocity.z)* (thisNode.velocity.x+thisNode.velocity.y+thisNode.velocity.z)) } cc+=1; }while(this.total_kinetic_energy >0.5) console.log(cc,this.total_kinetic_energy,this.graph) this.cancelAnimation(); } ForceLayout.prototype.HookesAttraction=function(v1ID,v2ID){ var a=this.graph.vertices[v1ID] var b=this.graph.vertices[v2ID] var force=new Point(this.attraction*(b.x - a.x),this.attraction*(b.y - a.y),this.attraction*(b.z - a.z)) // hook's attraction a.force.x += force.x; a.force.y += force.y; a.force.z += force.z; b.force.x += this.attraction*(a.x - b.x); b.force.y += this.attraction*(a.y - b.y); b.force.z += this.attraction*(a.z - b.z); return force; } ForceLayout.prototype.CoulombRepulsion=function(vertex1,vertex2){ //http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Coulomb's_law // distance squared = ((x1-x2)*(x1-x2)) + ((y1-y2)*(y1-y2)) + ((z1-z2)*(z1-z2)) var distanceSquared = ( (vertex1.x-vertex2.x)*(vertex1.x-vertex2.x)+ (vertex1.y-vertex2.y)*(vertex1.y-vertex2.y)+ (vertex1.z-vertex2.z)*(vertex1.z-vertex2.z) ); if(distanceSquared==0) distanceSquared = 0.001; var coul = this.repulsion / distanceSquared; return new Point(coul * (vertex1.x-vertex2.x),coul * (vertex1.y-vertex2.y), coul * (vertex1.z-vertex2.z)); } ForceLayout.prototype.animate=function(){ if(this.animating) this.animationID=requestAnimationFrame(this.animate.bind(this)); this.draw(); } ForceLayout.prototype.cancelAnimation=function(){ cancelAnimationFrame(this.animationID); this.animating=false; } ForceLayout.prototype.redraw=function(){ this.animating=true; this.animate(); } $(document).ready(function(){ var g= new Graph(); for(var i=0;i<=100;i++){ var v1=new Vertex(Math.random(), {}) var v2=new Vertex(Math.random(), {}) var e1= new Edge(v1.id,v2.id); g.addEdge(e1); } console.log(g); var l=new ForceLayout({ graph:g }); l.redraw(); });

    Read the article

  • How to print PCL Directly to the printer? Vb.net VS 2010

    - by Justin
    Good day, I've been trying to upgrade an old Print Program that prints raw pcl directly to the printer. The print program takes a PCL Mask and a PCL Batch Spool File (just pcl with page turn commands, I think) merges them and sends them off to the printer. I'm able to send to the Printer a file stream of PCL but I get mixed results and i do not understand why printing is so difficult under .net. I mean yes there is the PrintDocument class, but to print PCL... Let's just say I'm ready to detach my printer from the network and burn it a live. Here is my class PrintDirect (rather a hybrid class) Imports System Imports System.Text Imports System.Runtime.InteropServices <StructLayout(LayoutKind.Sequential)> _ Public Structure DOCINFO <MarshalAs(UnmanagedType.LPWStr)> _ Public pDocName As String <MarshalAs(UnmanagedType.LPWStr)> _ Public pOutputFile As String <MarshalAs(UnmanagedType.LPWStr)> _ Public pDataType As String End Structure 'DOCINFO Public Class PrintDirect <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=False, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function OpenPrinter(ByVal pPrinterName As String, ByRef phPrinter As IntPtr, ByVal pDefault As Integer) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=False, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function StartDocPrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr, ByVal Level As Integer, ByRef pDocInfo As DOCINFO) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=True, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function StartPagePrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Ansi, ExactSpelling:=True, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function WritePrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr, ByVal data As String, ByVal buf As Integer, ByRef pcWritten As Integer) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=True, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function EndPagePrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=True, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function EndDocPrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr) As Long End Function <DllImport("winspool.drv", CharSet:=CharSet.Unicode, ExactSpelling:=True, CallingConvention:=CallingConvention.StdCall)> _ Public Shared Function ClosePrinter(ByVal hPrinter As IntPtr) As Long End Function 'Helps uses to work with the printer Public Class PrintJob ''' <summary> ''' The address of the printer to print to. ''' </summary> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public PrinterName As String = "" Dim lhPrinter As New System.IntPtr() ''' <summary> ''' The object deriving from the Win32 API, Winspool.drv. ''' Use this object to overide the settings defined in the PrintJob Class. ''' </summary> ''' <remarks>Only use this when absolutly nessacary.</remarks> Public OverideDocInfo As New DOCINFO() ''' <summary> ''' The PCL Control Character or the ascii escape character. \x1b ''' </summary> ''' <remarks>ChrW(27)</remarks> Public Const PCL_Control_Character As Char = ChrW(27) ''' <summary> ''' Opens a connection to a printer, if false the connection could not be established. ''' </summary> ''' <returns></returns> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Function OpenPrint() As Boolean Dim rtn_val As Boolean = False PrintDirect.OpenPrinter(PrinterName, lhPrinter, 0) If Not lhPrinter = 0 Then rtn_val = True End If Return rtn_val End Function ''' <summary> ''' The name of the Print Document. ''' </summary> ''' <value></value> ''' <returns></returns> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Property DocumentName As String Get Return OverideDocInfo.pDocName End Get Set(ByVal value As String) OverideDocInfo.pDocName = value End Set End Property ''' <summary> ''' The type of Data that will be sent to the printer. ''' </summary> ''' <value>Send the print data type, usually "RAW" or "LPR". To overide use the OverideDocInfo Object</value> ''' <returns>The DataType as it was provided, if it is not part of the enumeration it is set to "UNKNOWN".</returns> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Property DocumentDataType As PrintDataType Get Select Case OverideDocInfo.pDataType.ToUpper Case "RAW" Return PrintDataType.RAW Case "LPR" Return PrintDataType.LPR Case Else Return PrintDataType.UNKOWN End Select End Get Set(ByVal value As PrintDataType) OverideDocInfo.pDataType = [Enum].GetName(GetType(PrintDataType), value) End Set End Property Public Property DocumentOutputFile As String Get Return OverideDocInfo.pOutputFile End Get Set(ByVal value As String) OverideDocInfo.pOutputFile = value End Set End Property Enum PrintDataType UNKOWN = 0 RAW = 1 LPR = 2 End Enum ''' <summary> ''' Initializes the printing matrix ''' </summary> ''' <param name="PrintLevel">I have no idea what the hack this is...</param> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Sub OpenDocument(Optional ByVal PrintLevel As Integer = 1) PrintDirect.StartDocPrinter(lhPrinter, PrintLevel, OverideDocInfo) End Sub ''' <summary> ''' Starts the next page. ''' </summary> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Sub StartPage() PrintDirect.StartPagePrinter(lhPrinter) End Sub ''' <summary> ''' Writes a string to the printer, can be used to write out a section of the document at a time. ''' </summary> ''' <param name="data">The String to Send out to the Printer.</param> ''' <returns>The pcWritten as an integer, 0 may mean the writter did not write out anything.</returns> ''' <remarks>Warning the buffer is automatically created by the lenegth of the string.</remarks> Public Function WriteToPrinter(ByVal data As String) As Integer Dim pcWritten As Integer = 0 PrintDirect.WritePrinter(lhPrinter, data, data.Length - 1, pcWritten) Return pcWritten End Function Public Sub EndPage() PrintDirect.EndPagePrinter(lhPrinter) End Sub Public Sub CloseDocument() PrintDirect.EndDocPrinter(lhPrinter) End Sub Public Sub ClosePrint() PrintDirect.ClosePrinter(lhPrinter) End Sub ''' <summary> ''' Opens a connection to a printer and starts a new document. ''' </summary> ''' <returns>If false the connection could not be established. </returns> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Function Open() As Boolean Dim rtn_val As Boolean = False rtn_val = OpenPrint() If rtn_val Then OpenDocument() End If Return rtn_val End Function ''' <summary> ''' Closes the document and closes the connection to the printer. ''' </summary> ''' <remarks></remarks> Public Sub Close() CloseDocument() ClosePrint() End Sub End Class End Class 'PrintDirect Here is how I print my file. I'm simple printing the PCL Masks, to show proof of concept. But I can't even do that. I can effectively create PCL and send it the printer without reading the file and it works fine... Plus I get mixed results with different stream reader text encoding as well. Dim pJob As New PrintDirect.PrintJob pJob.DocumentName = " test doc" pJob.DocumentDataType = PrintDirect.PrintJob.PrintDataType.RAW pJob.PrinterName = sPrinter.GetDevicePath '//This is where you'd stick your device name, sPrinter stands for Selected Printer from a dropdown (combobox). 'pJob.DocumentOutputFile = "C:\temp\test-spool.txt" If Not pJob.OpenPrint() Then MsgBox("Unable to connect to " & pJob.PrinterName, MsgBoxStyle.OkOnly, "Print Error") Exit Sub End If pJob.OpenDocument() pJob.StartPage() Dim sr As New IO.StreamReader(Me.txtFile.Text, Text.Encoding.ASCII) '//I've got best results with ASCII before, but only mized. Dim line As String = sr.ReadLine 'Fix for fly code on first run 'If line = 27 Then line = PrintDirect.PrintJob.PCL_Control_Character Do While (Not line Is Nothing) pJob.WriteToPrinter(line) line = sr.ReadLine Loop 'pJob.WriteToPrinter(ControlChars.FormFeed) pJob.EndPage() pJob.CloseDocument() sr.Close() sr.Dispose() sr = Nothing pJob.Close() I was able to get to print the mask, in the morning... now I'm getting strange printer characters scattered through 5 pages... I'm totally clueless. I must have changed something or the printer is at fault. You can access my test Check Mask, here http://kscserver.com/so/chk_mask.zip .

    Read the article

  • Silverlight 4 + WCF RIA - Data Service Design Best Practices

    - by Chadd Nervig
    Hey all. I realize this is a rather long question, but I'd really appreciate any help from anyone experienced with RIA services. Thanks! I'm working on a Silverlight 4 app that views data from the server. I'm relatively inexperienced with RIA Services, so have been working through the tasks of getting the data I need down to the client, but every new piece I add to the puzzle seems to be more and more problematic. I feel like I'm missing some basic concepts here, and it seems like I'm just 'hacking' pieces on, in time-consuming ways, each one breaking the previous ones as I try to add them. I'd love to get the feedback of developers experienced with RIA services, to figure out the intended way to do what I'm trying to do. Let me lay out what I'm trying to do: First, the data. The source of this data is a variety of sources, primarily created by a shared library which reads data from our database, and exposes it as POCOs (Plain Old CLR Objects). I'm creating my own POCOs to represent the different types of data I need to pass between server and client. DataA - This app is for viewing a certain type of data, lets call DataA, in near-realtime. Every 3 minutes, the client should pull data down from the server, of all the new DataA since the last time it requested data. DataB - Users can view the DataA objects in the app, and may select one of them from the list, which displays additional details about that DataA. I'm bringing these extra details down from the server as DataB. DataC - One of the things that DataB contains is a history of a couple important values over time. I'm calling each data point of this history a DataC object, and each DataB object contains many DataCs. The Data Model - On the server side, I have a single DomainService: [EnableClientAccess] public class MyDomainService : DomainService { public IEnumerable<DataA> GetDataA(DateTime? startDate) { /*Pieces together the DataAs that have been created since startDate, and returns them*/ } public DataB GetDataB(int dataAID) { /*Looks up the extended info for that dataAID, constructs a new DataB with that DataA's data, plus the extended info (with multiple DataCs in a List<DataC> property on the DataB), and returns it*/ } //Not exactly sure why these are here, but I think it //wouldn't compile without them for some reason? The data //is entirely read-only, so I don't need to update. public void UpdateDataA(DataA dataA) { throw new NotSupportedException(); } public void UpdateDataB(DataB dataB) { throw new NotSupportedException(); } } The classes for DataA/B/C look like this: [KnownType(typeof(DataB))] public partial class DataA { [Key] [DataMember] public int DataAID { get; set; } [DataMember] public decimal MyDecimalA { get; set; } [DataMember] public string MyStringA { get; set; } [DataMember] public DataTime MyDateTimeA { get; set; } } public partial class DataB : DataA { [Key] [DataMember] public int DataAID { get; set; } [DataMember] public decimal MyDecimalB { get; set; } [DataMember] public string MyStringB { get; set; } [Include] //I don't know which of these, if any, I need? [Composition] [Association("DataAToC","DataAID","DataAID")] public List<DataC> DataCs { get; set; } } public partial class DataC { [Key] [DataMember] public int DataAID { get; set; } [Key] [DataMember] public DateTime Timestamp { get; set; } [DataMember] public decimal MyHistoricDecimal { get; set; } } I guess a big question I have here is... Should I be using Entities instead of POCOs? Are my classes constructed correctly to be able to pass the data down correctly? Should I be using Invoke methods instead of Query (Get) methods on the DomainService? On the client side, I'm having a number of issues. Surprisingly, one of my biggest ones has been threading. I didn't expect there to be so many threading issues with MyDomainContext. What I've learned is that you only seem to be able to create MyDomainContextObjects on the UI thread, all of the queries you can make are done asynchronously only, and that if you try to fake doing it synchronously by blocking the calling thread until the LoadOperation finishes, you have to do so on a background thread, since it uses the UI thread to make the query. So here's what I've got so far. The app should display a stream of the DataA objects, spreading each 3min chunk of them over the next 3min (so they end up displayed 3min after the occurred, looking like a continuous stream, but only have to be downloaded in 3min bursts). To do this, the main form initializes, creates a private MyDomainContext, and starts up a background worker, which continuously loops in a while(true). On each loop, it checks if it has any DataAs left over to display. If so, it displays that Data, and Thread.Sleep()s until the next DataA is scheduled to be displayed. If it's out of data, it queries for more, using the following methods: public DataA[] GetDataAs(DateTime? startDate) { _loadOperationGetDataACompletion = new AutoResetEvent(false); LoadOperation<DataA> loadOperationGetDataA = null; loadOperationGetDataA = _context.Load(_context.GetDataAQuery(startDate), System.ServiceModel.DomainServices.Client.LoadBehavior.RefreshCurrent, false); loadOperationGetDataA.Completed += new EventHandler(loadOperationGetDataA_Completed); _loadOperationGetDataACompletion.WaitOne(); List<DataA> dataAs = new List<DataA>(); foreach (var dataA in loadOperationGetDataA.Entities) dataAs.Add(dataA); return dataAs.ToArray(); } private static AutoResetEvent _loadOperationGetDataACompletion; private static void loadOperationGetDataA_Completed(object sender, EventArgs e) { _loadOperationGetDataACompletion.Set(); } Seems kind of clunky trying to force it into being synchronous, but since this already is on a background thread, I think this is OK? So far, everything actually works, as much of a hack as it seems like it may be. It's important to note that if I try to run that code on the UI thread, it locks, because it waits on the WaitOne() forever, locking the thread, so it can't make the Load request to the server. So once the data is displayed, users can click on one as it goes by to fill a details pane with the full DataB data about that object. To do that, I have the the details pane user control subscribing to a selection event I have setup, which gets fired when the selection changes (on the UI thread). I use a similar technique there, to get the DataB object: void SelectionService_SelectedDataAChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) { DataA dataA = /*Get the selected DataA*/; MyDomainContext context = new MyDomainContext(); var loadOperationGetDataB = context.Load(context.GetDataBQuery(dataA.DataAID), System.ServiceModel.DomainServices.Client.LoadBehavior.RefreshCurrent, false); loadOperationGetDataB.Completed += new EventHandler(loadOperationGetDataB_Completed); } private void loadOperationGetDataB_Completed(object sender, EventArgs e) { this.DataContext = ((LoadOperation<DataB>)sender).Entities.SingleOrDefault(); } Again, it seems kinda hacky, but it works... except on the DataB that it loads, the DataCs list is empty. I've tried all kinds of things there, and I don't see what I'm doing wrong to allow the DataCs to come down with the DataB. I'm about ready to make a 3rd query for the DataCs, but that's screaming even more hackiness to me. It really feels like I'm fighting against the grain here, like I'm doing this in an entirely unintended way. If anyone could offer any assistance, and point out what I'm doing wrong here, I'd very much appreciate it! Thanks!

    Read the article

< Previous Page | 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254  | Next Page >